Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 316
1 of 316

Summary of Content for Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

EX EO

S T

O W

N ER

S M

A N

U A

L

In gl

s 3

R9 01

20 03

R (0

7. 09

) (

G T9

)

3R 90

12 00

3R

EX EO

S T

In gl

s (

07 .0

9)

Portada EXEO ST.qxd:Maquetacin 1 1/9/09 13:50 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.07.09

Portada EXEO ST_interior.qxd:maquetacin 1/9/09 13:26 Pgina 1

efully to familiarise yourself with

ill help preserve its value.

s and parts changes.

as it should be kept with the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner,

vehicle.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Contents 3

emory for driver's seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ead restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rmrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

oof carrier / roof rails* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

shtray*, cigarette lighter* and power points . .

ompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .

C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP) . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ower steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ervotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138

140

142

143

151

153

154

156

160

160

170

170

170

171

172

174

175

178

181

181

189

189

189

192

194

194

195

195

196

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls and equipment . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun roof / deflector* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual adjustment of the front seats . . . . . . . .

Electric adjustment of front seats* . . . . . . . . . . .

Lumbar support* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M

H

A

L

R

D

A

C

Hea

2

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

H

P

C

M

A

Pra

Inte

E

B

P

S

Driv

R

E

5

6

7

7

7

10

15

16

18

18

19

22

26

28

28

31

34

37

41

44

46

46

48

51

57

57

57

59

65

71

75

82

85

87

89

91

91

96

96

98

103

104

105

107

109

112

116

116

124

127

128

131

134

134

136

137

Contents4

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, replacement of parts and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .

Athermic windscreen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Releasing the tank flap manually . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing bulbs Halogen headlights . . . . . . . . .

Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights . . . .

Changing bulbs for rear lights (in side panel) . .

Changing rear light bulbs (in boot lid) . . . . . . . .

Side indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sunroof light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 HP) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 HP) . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 HP) . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 l 88 kW (120 HP) CR . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l 105 kW (143 HP) . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 HP) . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

197

199

200

200

203

211

211

212

217

220

220

220

221

221

222

222

223

224

224

226

228

231

234

237

238

242

242

251

251

254

259

262

264

264

271

277

281

283

283

284

285

285

288

291

291

291

293

294

294

295

295

296

297

298

299

301

302

304

305

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading the on-board manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

As this is a general manual for the EXEO ST, some of the equipment and func- tions described in this manual are not included in all types or versions of the model. These may vary or be modified depending on technical and market requirements, which can in no way be interpreted as deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain

versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,

or else it is only on sale in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

This shows the end of the section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.

Caution Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of

damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-

mental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five main

sections which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Safe driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Data

isted here are part of the vehicle's

tem. They work together to help

in a wide variety of accident situa-

our passengers should not be left to chance. In

safety features incorporated in your vehicle are

f injury. These are just a few of the safety

timised for all seats,

seats,

e front seat belts,

nd rear seat backrests*,

,

only.

ISOFIX child safety seats on the outer rear

straints,

n,

res are harmonised to provide you and your

sible protection in accident situations.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment l

passenger restraint sys

reduce the risk of injury

tions.

Your safety and the safety of y

the event of an accident, the

capable of reducing the risk o

features in your SEAT:

Three-point seat belts op

Belt force limiters for the

belt tension devices for th

front airbags,

side airbags in the front a

head-protection airbags*

knee airbag for left guide

ISOFIX mountings* for

seats,

height-adjustable head re

adjustable steering colum

These individual safety featu

passengers with the best pos

Safe driving8

are protected with suitable safety seats

belts page 46.

. Inform your passengers as to how they

rrectly. Make sure that your passengers

8.

g?

ctly related to how you drive, and can

assengers in the vehicle.

r the safety of the vehicle and all its occu-

e is impaired in any way, you endanger

ers . Therefore:

istracted by passengers or by using a

riving ability is impaired (by medication,

ns and speed limits and always maintain

ehicle in front.

ed to suit the road, traffic and weather

long trips. Do not drive for more than two

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

However, they can only be effective if you and your passengers sit in the

correct position and adjust and use the safety equipment properly.

Therefore, this chapter explains why these safety features are so important,

how they can protect you, what you need to remember when using them and

how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them. There are

also a number of important safety warnings that you and your passengers

should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's responsibility!

Before setting off

The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and

the safe operation of the vehicle at all times.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before setting off:

Make sure that all lights and indicators are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to

the outside.

Secure all luggage and other items carefully page 16.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly.

Make sure that the head restraints for all passengers are

adjusted to the correct position.

Make sure that children

and properly worn seat

Sit in a correct position

should sit page 10.

Fasten your seat belt co

do the same page 1

What affects safe drivin

Safety on the road is dire

also be affected by the p

The driver is responsible fo

pants. If your ability to driv

yourself and other road us

Do not let yourself be d

mobile phone, etc.

Never drive when your d

alcohol, drugs, etc.).

Obey all traffic regulatio

a safe distance to the v

Always adjust your spe

conditions.

Take frequent breaks on

hours without a stop.

Safe driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Data

ired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

What affects driving safety?

Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and

the personal behaviour of all occupants.

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.

When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circum-

stance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road ,

for this reason:

Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,

e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.

Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.

WARNING

When driving safety is impa dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least

ering wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your back rests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

25 cm between the ste

fig. 1.

Move the driver's seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Data

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger's seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your back rests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

securely page 18.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

r's seat page 134.

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between sh panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, otect you properly.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Fasten your safety belt securely page 18.

Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 134.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your safety belt

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 23.

Adjusting the front passenge

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Adjust the front passeng your breastbone and the da the airbag system cannot pr

Safe driving12

securely page 18.

d restraint system when you take children

6.

ear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the headrest to the correct position page 14.

Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.

Fasten your safety belt

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Data

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 134.

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

t in its guides until it clicks into place.

wer the head restraint.

hould the rear passengers travel while the -use position.

ar head restraint with either of the outer seat

ccident!

djustment of the head restraints page 13.

itting positions

tion can lead to severe injuries to

imal protection only when the belt webs

correct sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

web position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

ssume an incorrect sitting position in the

.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the

occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button fig. 5 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button fig. 5 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Press button and lo

WARNING

Under no circumstances s head restraints are in the non

Do not swap the centre re rear head restraints.

Injury risk in case of an a

Caution Note the instructions on the a

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting posi

occupants.

Seat belts can provide opt

are properly positioned. In

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect belt

responsible for all vehicle

Never allow anyone to a

vehicle while travelling

Fig. 5 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Safe driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Data

als must never be impaired by objects

ways press the accelerator, brake and

red to the floor.

can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

ve the pedal area free and can be securely

ke pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

ion can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into dal operation. In the event of a sudden driving ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or

cident!

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be

dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to

make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle,

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest far to the rear,

never lean against the dash panel,

never lie on the rear bench,

never sit on the front edge of a seat,

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a window,

never put your feet out of a window,

never put your feet on the dash panel,

never put your feet on the surface of a seat,

never travel in a foot well ,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all ped

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can al

clutch pedals unimpai

Ensure that the pedals

tions.

Use only floor mats which lea

fastened on the foot well.

If a brake circuit fails, the bra

order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operat

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair pe or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of ac

Safe driving16

ly in the luggage compartment.

gage as far forward as possible in the

low as possible in the luggage compart-

the fitted fastening rings page 17.

objects in the boot could cause serious inju-

e luggage compartment and secure them on

raps to secure heavy objects.

es or accidents, loose objects can be thrown pants or passers-by. This increased risk of d if a loose object is struck by an inflating

ts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

re of gravity may shift when transporting t the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- l to adjust your speed and driving style ts.

axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the ed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- change, leading to accidents, injuries and

nattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment closing the door

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Floor mats on the driver side

Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened

in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip

and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to

prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

fied dealership.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju- ries.

Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the boot

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load even

Lay and stow heavy lug

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as

ment.

Secure heavy objects to

WARNING

Loose luggage and other ries.

Always stow objects in th the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist st

During sudden manoeuvr forward, injuring vehicle occu injury will be further increase airbag. If this happens, objec fatal injury.

Please note that the cent heavy objects; this may affec dent. Therefore, it is essentia accordingly, to avoid acciden

Never exceed the allowed allowed axle load or the allow acteristics of the vehicle may damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle u open. Children could climb in

Safe driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Data

d of the vehicle and the weight of the object.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle.

4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

ht. That means that the effective weight of the

kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

his projectile strikes an occupant as it flies

artment. This increased risk of injury will be

bject is struck by an inflating airbag.

ther objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could result in the s or accidents.

age or other objects from flying forward, ining cords which are secured to the fastening

t on the fastening rings.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in page 18.

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Fastening rings

There can be four fastening rings in the boot for fastening

luggage and other objects.

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage

and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the

boot on page 16.

Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.

During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so

much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

energy depends on the spee

The most significant factor, h

Example: An object weighing

a frontal collision at a speed

sponding to 20 times its weig

object increases to about 90

which might be sustained if t

through the passenger comp

further increased if a loose o

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or o with inappropriate or damag event of braking manoeuvre

To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate reta rings.

Never secure a child sea

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts18

le seats must never be transported in your

hicle must properly fasten and wear the seat at. Children must be protected with an appro-

*

s a reminder to the driver to fasten

:

securely.

s to fasten their seat belts properly before

g a child seat according to the child's

, the warning light will remain lit until the

ere applicable) have fastened their seat belts.

a certain speed, you will also hear a warning

ill flash.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Seat belts

Brief introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

More people than availab vehicle.

Every passenger in the ve belt belonging to his or her se priate child restraint system.

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts a

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle

Fasten your safety belt

Instruct your passenger

driving off.

Protect children by usin

height and weight.

After switching on the ignition

driver and front passenger (wh

When the vehicle has reached

signal and the warning light w

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Data

aws of physics work in the case of a head-on

rts moving fig. 6, a certain amount of energy

produced in the vehicle and its occupants.

y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

passengers. The higher the speed and the

energy there is to be released in an accident.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

ur example are not restrained by seat belts, all

ergy has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

ve forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 7 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the l

collision: When a vehicle sta

known as kinetic energy is

The amount of kinetic energ

weight of the vehicle and its

greater the weight, the more

The most significant factor, h

doubles from 25 km/h to 50

plied by four.

Because the passengers in o

of the passengers' kinetic en

fig. 7.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one to

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat

frontal collision, they will mo

Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts20

acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

stitute for the seat belts. When triggered,

l protection. All passengers (including the

roperly during the trip. This will reduce the risk

of an accident regardless of whether an

not.

ered only once. To achieve the best possible

always be worn properly so that you will be

h no airbag is deployed.

passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

anger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 9 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-

dents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the forces

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dashboard

fig. 8.

The airbag system is not a sub

airbags provide only additiona

driver) must wear seat belts p

of severe injuries in the event

airbag is fitted for the seat or

Note that airbags can be trigg

protection, the seat belt must

protected in accidents in whic

It is also important for the rear

could otherwise be thrown for

who do not use seat belts end

occupants fig. 9.

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Data

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

t belts is an effective means of substantially

d improving the chances of survival in a serious

rly worn seat belts improve the protection

ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a

most countries.

pped with airbags, the seat belts must be

airbags, for example, are only triggered in some

irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal

ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

e in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

eir seat belts properly before you drive off!

using seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this section.

lts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Seat belt protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers

have shown that wearing sea

reducing the risk of injury an

accident. Furthermore, prope

provided by airbags in the ev

seat belt is required by law in

Although your vehicle is equi

fastened and worn. The front

frontal accidents. The front a

collisions, minor side collisio

airbag trigger threshold valu

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened th

Safety instructions on

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat be

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 10 A driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts22

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the belt web is not

Fig. 11 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear seat belts, otherwise they may be in danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept cl properly page 219.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Data

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 12 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with a click page 22,

fig. 11.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension

devices page 26.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts24

lso fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the belt web

age 23.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 14.

o the buckle for the appropriate seat and

securely locked with a click .

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 23, fig. 12.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 23, fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

Pregnant women must a

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate int

push it down until it is

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Data

hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.

ment

rs can be used to adjust the height of

e seat belt.

an be lowered by keeping the button

e time.

to adjust the belt height.

Fig. 16 Belt height adjustment - top guide fitting

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 15. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by

is not damaged.

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini

Seat belt height adjust

Seat belt height adjuste

the shoulder area of th

The belt height adjuster c

pressed down at the sam

Press button fig. 16

Fig. 15 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts26

elt increases the risk of severe injuries.

your passengers to adjust their seat belts r the whole journey.

information and warnings concerning the use

es

sion device

, the seat belts on the front seats are

upants are equipped with belt tension devices.

nsion devices during severe head-on, lateral

eat belt is being worn. This retracts and

ng the forward motion of the occupants.

triggered only once.

ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns or in situations where no large

rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

ion of fire in the vehicle.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Take hold of the top guide fitting and slide it up or down so that

the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned roughly midway

over the shoulder, although it must never rest against the neck

page 25, fig. 16 in Seat belt position on page 23.

After adjusting, pull the belt sharply to check that the catch on

the guide fitting is engaged securely.

Note It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best

position for the front seat belts.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal

injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-

sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the

vehicle is moving .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat b

Before every trip, instruct properly and to wear them fo

Read and always observe of seat belts page 21.

Belt tension devic

Function of the belt ten

During a frontal collision

retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the front occ

Sensors will trigger the belt te

and rear collisions only if the s

tightens the seat belts, reduci

The belt tension device can be

The belt tension devices will n

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side or

Note If the belt tension devices

normal and it is not an indicat

A2

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or

components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.

Service and disposal of belt tension devices

The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed

in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove

and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat

belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-

dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.

The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system28

critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

t airbags can completely deploy when trig-

m protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

d the speed of the vehicle.

red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

ollision and detected by the control unit. If the

during the collision and measured by the

specified reference values, the front, side

be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an

gs had been triggered.

orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.

hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is

, size or weight.

at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.

y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 18.

Adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflict

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fron

gered, providing their maximu

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision an

Whether the airbags are trigge

ation rate resulting from the c

vehicle deceleration occurring

control unit remains below the

and/or curtain airbag will not

damage in a vehicle involved

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat

All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by

To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 18

Airbag system 29

Safety Fir Technical Data

ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:

enger airbag page 44, Deactivating

e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.

ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being .

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

g and belt tension device system

itors the airbag and belt tension

ll airbags and belt tension devices in the

ts and wiring connections.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Always properly adjust the front seats.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if

he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport

all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a

If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi

Disable the front pass airbags*.

The child seat must b use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the sa

Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airba

This warning lamp mon

device system.

The warning lamp monitors a

vehicle, including control uni

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system30

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

miliar with these requirements.

ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.

hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, y them in any way.

ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.

el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could

djust, remove or install parts of the airbag

stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the

ation and qualified personnel.

ou to go to a qualified workshop for all work

front bumper or the body.

ction for just one accident; replace them once

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system

Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly

monitored electronically. The warning lamp will light every time the igni-

tion is switched on until you attach your seatbelt.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.

Have the system inspected immediately by a qualified workshop.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig- gered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance and disposal of the airbags

The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.

If you work on the airbag system or remove and fit parts of the system when

performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged.

The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates

incorrectly or does not inflate at all.

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are fa

WARNING

If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate

Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif

It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf

To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airbag cause substantial injuries.

Never attempt to repair, a system.

Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform

We strongly recommend y on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the

The airbags provide prote they have deployed.

Airbag system 31

Safety Fir Technical Data

r is located in the steering wheel fig. 17 and

nger is located in the instrument panel

ied by the word AIRBAG. On the driver's side,

the front footwell, under the instrument panel.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

ion for the head and chest in the event of a

ge 34, Safety notes on the frontal airbag

nction of restraining the occupants, the seat

front passenger in a position where the airbags

tion in a frontal collision.

bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

he seat belts at all times, not only because this

untries, but also for your safety page 18,

Fig. 18 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the drive

the airbag for the front passe

fig. 18. Airbags are identif

the knee airbag* is found in

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protect

severe frontal collision pa

system.

In addition to their normal fu

belts also hold the driver and

can provide maximum protec

The airbag system is not a su

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear t

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

Fig. 17 Driver's Airbag in the steering wheel and knee airbag in the instru- ment panel

Airbag system32

ags

the risk of head or chest injury.

so that the airbags for the driver and front

evere frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 19. The fully deployed

ovement of the front occupants and help to

head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

the front occupants to see forward.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

Fig. 19 Inflated front airbags

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The main parts of the front airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),

the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front

passenger,

a knee airbag* for the driver,

a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 29.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp

does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 29

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of frontal airb

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designed

passenger are triggered in a s

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward m

reduce the risk of injury to the

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently for

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags e triggered

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or instrument panel when the

driver's and front passenger's airbags are triggered fig. 20. The airbag

covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fi ar

Airbag system34

airbag

des additional protection to front seat

roperly secured.

is located in the instrument panel underneath

nal protection to the driver's knees and upper

plement to the safety belts.

knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal colli-

nction, safety belts help keep the driver in posi-

n so that the airbags can provide protection.

stitute for seat belts. It is, on the other hand,

fety system of your vehicle. Always remember

Fig. 21 Driver's knee airbag

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Safety notes on the frontal airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Knee airbag*

Description of the knee

The airbag system provi

passengers if they are p

The knee airbag for the driver

the steering wheel fig. 21.

The knee airbag offers additio

and lower thigh areas as a sup

If the front airbags deploy, the

sions page 32.

Besides their normal safety fu

tion in case of a frontal collisio

The airbag system is not a sub

part of the overall occupant sa

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Data

ag system can only provide protection when seating position.

ht comes on when the vehicle is being used, mediately by your Authorised Service Centre.

perly when the vehicle acceleration in a side eploy the airbag. See also page 65.

leg area is reduced by fully deployed

een designed so that the airbag for the driver is

ll frontal collisions.

Fig. 22 Inflated airbags protect in a frontal colli- sion.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your

safety belt and wearing it properly.

Remember too that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of

accidents - your safety belts are always there to offer protection in those acci-

dents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already

deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by another after

the first collision.

This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the safety

belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the safety

belts. Therefore, always wear your safety belts correctly.

It is important to remember that while the supplemental airbag system is

designed to reduce the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, for

example, swelling, bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with

airbags.

The knee airbag system basically consists of:

The electronic control module

One inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generator) for the driver

An airbag indicator light in the instrument panel

The knee airbag system will not deploy:

when the ignition is turned off

in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is

too low

in side collisions

in rear-end collisions

in rollovers

in the event of a system malfunction (warning/indicator light illuminated)

page 65.

WARNING

Safety belts and the airb occupants are in the proper

If the airbag indicator lig have the system inspected im The airbag may not work pro collision is high enough to d

How knee airbags work

The risk of injury to the

knee airbags.

The knee airbag system has b

deployed in certain but not a

Airbag system36

st and the steering wheel/instrument panel.

es and the lower part of the instrument panel.

y increases if you lean forward or to the side, sitioned and you are not wearing your safety

more should the airbag deploy.

knee airbag can inflate without interference. d the airbag can increase the risk of injury in th the way the airbag deploys or by being deploys.

should be carried in the footwell area in front objects (shopping bags, for example) can

deployment of the airbag. Small objects can hicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or

acks, deep scratches or other damage in the where the knee airbag is located.

seated, their risk of injury increases in the 6.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If the front airbag deploys, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal colli-

sions.

When the system is deployed, the airbag starts to fill with a propellant gas,

and inflates between the lower part of the instrument panel and the driver

page 35, fig. 22.

Although they are not a soft pillow, they can cushion the impact and in this

way they can help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower extremities.

All this takes place instantaneously, so fast that many people do not even

realize that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great

deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in

their way when they deploy.

Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn safety belts slow

down and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce risk.

Important safety notes on the knee airbag system

Airbags are only supplemental restraints.

Always wear safety belts correctly and drive in a proper seated position. There

is a lot that you and your passengers must know and do to help the safety

belts and airbags to provide supplementary protection.

WARNING

An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injury. Wearing safety belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.

The airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting their seating posi- tions, it is important for drivers to keep their upper bodies and knees to the following minimum safe distances:

25 cm between the che

10 cm between the kne

The risk of personal injur or if the seat is improperly po belt. The risk increases even

Always make sure that the Objects between yourself an an accident by interfering wi thrust into you as the airbag

No objects of any kind of the driver's seat. Bulky hinder or prevent proper be thrown through the ve your passengers.

Make sure there are no cr area of the instrument panel

If children are incorrectly case of an accident page 4

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Data

ont seats and the outer rear seats in a position

rovide maximum protection.

bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

st important to wear the seat belts at all times,

ired by law in most countries, but also for your

oduction.

ot be triggered if:

ff,

sion,

,

n,

system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

he backrests of the front seats and the rear side

ar wheel housing.

dash panel insert page 29.

is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on

e side airbags will not work, if the sensors do essure increase on the interior of the doors,

the areas with holes or openings in the door

f the interior panels have been removed.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Side airbags*

Description of side airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger's

seat backrests fig. 23. The rear side airbags are located in the rear wheel

housing lining. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.

Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

pants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side

collision page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag

system.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their

normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

hold the passengers in the fr

where the side airbags can p

The airbag system is not a su

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts. Therefore, it is mo

not only because this is requ

safety page 18, Brief intr

The side airbag system will n

the ignition is switched o

there is a minor side colli

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collisio

the vehicle turns over.

The main parts of the airbag

an electronic control and

The front side airbags in t

airbags in the lining of the re

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

lamp will light up for approx.

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision, th not correctly measure the pr due to air escaping through panel.

Never drive the vehicle i

Fig. 23 Side airbag in driver seat

Airbag system38

uce the risk of head or chest injury in

ions.

de airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

hion the movement of the occupants of the

eats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

Fig. 24 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been correctly closed.

Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.

Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a qualified author- ised workshop.

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Function of side airbags

Inflated airbags can red

many side impact collis

In some side collisions, the si

vehicle fig. 24.

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

may develop when the airbag

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cus

front seats and the outer rear s

upper body.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.

Airbag system40

incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.

ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.

components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 220, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio

Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste

Do not attempt to modify

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Data

untries, but also for your safety page 18,

airbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

gs with gas generator) for the driver, front

n the rear seats,

dash panel insert page 29.

is monitored electronically.

ll not be triggered

ff,

,

n,

ion,

airbag system, have the system checked imme- hop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a il to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 25 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and

the curtain airbags (airba

passenger and passengers o

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

The curtain airbag system wi

the ignition is switched o

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collisio

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collis

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the diately by a qualified works collision, the system may fa

Fig. 25 Location of left curtain airbag

Airbag system42

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

ration of the curtain airbag system

tly, they can considerably reduce the

ds of accident.

gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

ad air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

ersons, animals or objects between the occu- the deployment space of the curtain airbags deploy without restriction and provide the

Therefore, sun blinds which have not been your vehicle may not be attached to the side

ssories, replacement of parts and modifica-

ould be used only for lightweight clothing. Do -edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not gers.

ction for just one accident; replace them once

irbag system or removal and installation of her repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Function of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

of the vehicle fig. 26.

In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and

help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the ope

If you use airbags correc

risk of injury in many kin

WARNING

In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the he vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

There must be no other p pants of the outer seats and so that the curtain airbag can greatest possible protection. expressly approved for use in windows page 220, Acce tions.

The built-in coat hooks sh not leave any heavy or sharp hang the clothes on coat han

The airbags provide prote they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain a the airbag components for ot

Fig. 26 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system44

g is deactivated, this means that only the

d. All the other airbags in the vehicle

airbag

in the key-operated switch in the glove

n OFF fig. 27.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

en the ignition is switched on .

irbag

in the key-operated switch in the glove

n ON fig. 27.

Fig. 28 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

A0

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Deactivating airbags*

Disabling front passenger airbag

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

frontal airbag is deactivate

remain functional.

Disabling front passenger

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

compartment to positio

Check that the warning

fig. 28 remains lit wh

Enabling front passenger a

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

compartment to positio

Fig. 27 In the glovebox: key for enabling and disa- bling front passenger airbag

Airbag system 45

Safety Fir Technical Data

er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.

key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does

page 44, fig. 28 not light up when the ignition is switched on

.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should only deactivate the front passenger airbag when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat page 46, Child safety

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn

When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

together with the on-board documentation,

instructions manual.

hild seats

s substantially reduces the risk of

onsible for any children you transport in

properly using appropriate child seats

belt webbing is properly positioned

tions provided by the manufacturer of the

allow children to distract you from traffic.

uring long trips. Take a break at least

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front nt passenger airbag has been disabled. This

ally fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is es, to transport a child in the front passenger ag must always be disabled page 44,

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the

rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint

system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and

weight. It is advisable that children always travel in the rear seats, the rear

central position being the safest seat, since the risk of injuries in a side colli-

sion is diminished.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Program, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke1).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note

page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to include

the manufacturer's Child Seat

Safety notes on using c

Proper use of child seat

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are resp

your vehicle.

Protect your children by

page 48.

Always ensure that the

according to the instruc

child seat.

When travelling, do not

Take breaks regularly d

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the fro could lead to a risk of potenti necessary, in exceptional cas seat, the front passenger airb1) Not for all countries

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Data

aximum protection only when the belt web is 22, Seat belts.

py a child seat page 48, Child seats.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other passengers.

If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- gered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehicle.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or in sudden braking manoeuvres.

The seat belt provides m properly positioned page

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 29.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

ructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

together with the on-board documentation,

instructions manual.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.

Fig. 29 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:

Economic Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: Children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's inst

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

the manufacturer's Child Seat

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Data

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

e together with the on-board documentation,

t instructions manual.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 31.

Fig. 31 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,

the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to includ

the manufacturer's Child Sea

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 30 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 22, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Child safety 51

Safety Fir Technical Data

n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front ont passenger airbag has been disabled. This

the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- hild in the front passenger seat, the front ys be disabled page 44, Deactivating t to its highest position, in case it has this

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Seats for children aged 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be

secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether

securing rings page 52.

U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age

category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

seat belt).

*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible

and always deactivate the airbag.

L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.

WARNING

When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the fr could cause fatal injuries to tional cases, to transport a c passenger airbag must alwa airbags* and move the sea adjustment.

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Category Weight

Seat locations

Front passenger

Rear outer Rear centre

Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U

Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U

Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U

Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U

Child safety52

given by the child seat manufacturer

ing the seat.

the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages

nd the seat fig. 32.

horages along the plastic guides until

FIX rings (when correctly closed, you will

eat should also have a visual indicator to

cured) fig. 33.

ystem is correctly secured by pulling on

e supplied with the child safety seat.

ntings are available from Dealers and specialist

Fig. 33 The ISOFIX child seat anchorings slide along the fitted plastic guides until secured in the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Child seat mounting using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system

The Child restraint systems may be fitted to the rear seat

quickly and safely with the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system

(fitted to the rear seatback).

Following the instructions

when installing and remov

Fit the plastic guides on

between the backrest a

Slide the child seat anc

secured in the car's ISO

hear a click and the s

confirm it is correctly se

Check that the ISOFIX s

the child seat.

Detailed fitting instructions ar

Child seats with ISOFIX mou

retailers.

Fig. 32 Position of the ISOFIX anchorages on the side rear seat

Child safety 53

Safety Fir Technical Data

educe forwards movements of the safety seat in

sk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside

tive will introduce requirements related to the

tems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether anchor-

or new types from 2010), which will entail

ld restraint seat and less head movement in

r-facing seats

rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a

y read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's

n how to install the retainer strap properly.

safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the

ap to a hook in the luggage compartment.

ge or other items to the lower anchorages Top Tether).

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

The retainers employed for this child safety seat are specially designed for the ISOFIX system. Never secure other child seats, seat belts or other items into the retainers. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Top Tether retainer straps

Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring

point, apart from both ISOFIX anchoring points, which

allow better child retention.

The Top Tether system has an upper strap for attachment to the vehicle's

upper anchoring point, which is found on the rear luggage compartment

cover.

The retainer strap is used to r

a crash, helping reduce the ri

of the vehicle.

It is foreseen that an EU Direc

retention of child restraint sys

ages (probably compulsory f

improved retention of the chi

case of frontal collisions.

Use of retainer straps on rea

At present there are very few

retainer strap. Please carefull

instructions for information o

WARNING

An undue installation of the event of a crash.

Never tie the retainer str

Never secure or tie lugga (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (

Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the rear tray

Child safety54

rap

ap in line with the instructions given by

nufacturer.

se it from the anchoring support.

WARNINGS page 53.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point

Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point situated on the vehicle luggage compartment cover

Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according to

the manufacturer's instructions.

Lead the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head

restraint fig. 35 (lift the head restraint where necessary).

Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint seat

is correctly secured to the luggage compartment cover

anchorage.

Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint

seat manufacturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining st

Release the retainer str

the child safety seat ma

Push the lock and relea

WARNING

Read and bear in mind all the

Fig. 35 Retainer strap: correct adjustment and fitting

55

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

56

Fig. 3

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

6 Some of the equipment listed in this section is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.

Cockpit 57

Safety Fir Technical Data

t fitted: Sound system or navigation

ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

indow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ving home: delayed lights off and

unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

telephone*

157

31

162

127

169

154

154

66

174

138

226

120

119

178

31

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Controls and equipment

Cockpit

Overview

Instrument panel overview

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Door handle

Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric adjuster for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air outlets with thumbwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lever for indicators and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Levers and switches for:

Windscreen wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Depending on equipment fitted:

Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamp indicating that front passenger's airbag has

been disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch for acoustic parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowage compartments

Depending on equipmen

system

Lockable glove compartm

Front passenger's airbag

Climate control . . . . . .

Switch for heated rear w

Thumbwheel for seat he

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual gear lever

Cigarette lighter / Socke

Auxiliary socket

Tyre pressure monitoring

Stowage compartment

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .

Seat memory* . . . . . . .

Bonnet lock release . .

Headlight range control

coming home and lea

anticipated lights on f

Lever for cruise control

Steering wheel with:

Horn

Driver's airbag . . . .

Controls for radio and

A1 109

A2

A3 100

A4 132

A5 167

A6 116

A7 123

A8 59

A9

128

85

87

A10 171

A11

68

44

175

A12 122

A13 153

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

A28

A29

A30

A31

A32

Cockpit58

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle wallet compartment / knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note Separate operating instructions are enclosed if the vehicle is equipped

with a factory-fitted radio or navigation system.

The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models*

may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 56, fig. 36.

However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

A33 170

A34 31

Cockpit 59

Safety Fir Technical Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61

62

74

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Instruments

Instrument panel overview

The instrument panel is the driver's information centre.

Fig. 37 Overview of instrument panel

Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rev counter incorporating digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speedometer (incorporating mileage recorder display) . . . . . .

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjuster buttons for

Digital clock and date

Instrument lighting .

Digital display with

Service indicator . . .

A1 60

A2 61, 61

A3 65

A4 63

A5 63

A6

A7

Cockpit60

dle will settle somewhere in the centre of the

ed running temperature. The temperature may

orking hard, especially at high outside temper-

ncern, provided the warning lamp does not

el.

display, this means that either the coolant

coolant level is too low page 78.

t and checking the coolant level, observe the 227.

en steam or coolant is being released from it. t until you can no longer see or hear escaping

nlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

d high engine loads, there is a risk of the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHECK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Call-up button for service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset button for trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant temperature gauge

The coolant temperature gauge fig. 38 only works when the ignition is

switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following

notes for the different temperature ranges.

Cold temperature

If the needle is still on the left of the dial, this indicates that the engine has

not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy accelera-

tion and do not make the engine work hard.

Normal temperature

In normal operations, the nee

dial once the engine has reach

also rise when the engine is w

atures. This is no cause for co

light up in the instrument pan

Warning temperature

If the symbol flashes in the

temperature is too high or the

WARNING

Before opening the bonne warning information page

Never open the bonnet wh This could lead to burns. Wai steam or coolant.

Caution Accessories in front of the air i

high outside temperatures an

engine overheating.

71

A8 64

A9 74

A10 63

Fig. 38 Engine coolant temperature gauge

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 61

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment help you to save fuel and minimise engine

d with a quartz clock.

using the and buttons.

n. The hour display will start to flash.

ons to set the hour.

Fig. 40 Detail of the dash panel insert: Digital clock

+ -

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions

per minute.

You should select a lower gear if the engine speed drops below 1500 rpm.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed

which may be used when the engine is warm and after it has been run in prop-

erly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or lift your foot off the accel-

erator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev. counter needle fig. 39 must only reach the red zone for a short

period, otherwise the engine could be damaged. The start of the red zone on

the dial is different for some engine versions.

For the sake of the e Changing up a gear early will

noise.

Digital clock and date

Your vehicle is equippe

The time and date are set

Setting the hour

Press the butto

Use the and butt

Fig. 39 Detailed view of the dash panel insert: Rev. counter

MODE

+ -

Cockpit62

off, the mileage recorder and the digital clock

ed on for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK

.

strument lighting can be adjusted as

increase the brightness of the instrument

educe the brightness of the instrument

and needles), the centre console illumination

plays are regulated by a light sensor incorpo-

depending on the outside light.

Fig. 41 Instrument panel lighting

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Setting the minutes

Keep pressing the button until the minutes display

flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the minutes.

Setting the date

Keep pressing the button until the date display (day)

flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the day.

Keep pressing the button until the month display flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the month.

Keep pressing the button until the year display flashes.

Use the and buttons to set the year.

Disabling the date display

Keep pressing the button until the complete date display

flashes.

Use the button to disable the date display.

Enabling the date display

Keep pressing the button until the complete date display

flashes.

Use the button to enable the date display.

When the display stops flashing, this means the setting you are performing

is completed and the time and date have been successfully stored.

When the ignition is switched

with date display can be switch

button page 59, fig. 37

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the in

required.

Press the "+" button to

lighting.

Press the "-" button to r

lighting.

The instrument lighting (dials

and the illumination of the dis

rated in the instrument panel,

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

+ -

MODE

-

MODE

+

A8

Cockpit 63

Safety Fir Technical Data

ment panel, the letters DEF will appear perma-

play. Please have the fault rectified as soon as

lted when the ignition is switched on.

e message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder

nger be started if that happens.

the ignition is switched on.

reserve zone, the symbol lights up in the

page 80. At this point there are still about 8 to

k. This is your reminder to fill up soon.

city of your vehicle in the page 304, Dimen-

.

dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfiring

el could reach the exhaust system without

catalytic converter reheating and being

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Speedometer with distance display

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and the

distance travelled.

The distance is normally stated in kilometres (km). On some models,

however, the mileage recorder will show miles.

Lower distance display

The lower distance display records the vehicle's total mileage.

Upper distance display (trip recorder)

The upper distance display shows the distance that has been travelled since

the trip recorder was last reset. It is used to measure short journeys. The last

digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile.

The upper distance display can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button

fig. 42.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instru

nently in the trip recorder dis

possible.

Electronic immobiliser

The vehicle key data is consu

If an uncoded key is used, th

display. The vehicle can no lo

Fuel reserve

The display only works when

When the needle reaches the

instrument cluster display 10 litres of fuel left in the tan

You can consult the tank capa

sions and capacities section

Caution Never run the tank completely

can occur. This means that fu

burning. This may lead to the

damaged.

Fig. 42 Detail of the dash panel insert: Distance display

Cockpit64

the display page 75, or if the bulb monitor

lights page 81, the relevant driver informa-

briefly pressing the button. For

il level

om the display after about 5 seconds.

on to set speed limit warning 1 page 83,

while the vehicle is moving. Speed limit

en the ignition is switched off page 84,

.

CHECK

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

CHECK button

The button has the following functions:

Enabling the digital clock and the distance display

When the ignition is switched off, the distance display and the digital clock

with date display can be enabled for a few seconds by pressing the

button fig. 43.

Starting check procedure (auto-check control)

The auto-check control page 75 checks important components and vehicle

systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition

is switched on.

You can start the check procedure manually by pressing the button

with the ignition switched on. This function check can be started with the

engine either stationary or running, but not at road speeds above 5 km/h.

Calling up driver messages

If a Priority 1 symbol flashes in

detects a failure of one of the

tion can be called up again by

example:

Switch off engine, check o

The message will disappear fr

Speed warning

You can press the butt

Setting speed limit warning 1

warning 2* can only be set wh Setting speed limit warning 2Fig. 43 Detail of the dash

panel insert: CHECK button

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

Cockpit 65

Safety Fir Technical Data

nitored by the auto-check control page 75. If

his will be shown by the display in the instru-

symbol (priority 1 - danger) or a yellow symbol

page 67

rs page 67

system (ABS) page 67

ng page 68

page 68

ilisation programme (ESP) page 68

page 69

dlights page 69

ment (alternative to ) page 69

m (alternative to ) page 70

ystem / handbrake is page 70

page 68

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Warning and indicator lamps

General description

The warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of

different functions and possible faults.

Fig. 44 Instrument panel with warning and indicator lamps

Note A number of functions are mo

a malfunction should occur, t

ment cluster either with a red

(priority 2 - warning).

Exhaust emission control system page 66

Airbag system page 66

Tyre pressure too low page 66

Cruise control

Trailer indicato

Anti-lock brake

Seat belt warni

Left indicators

Electronic stab

Alternator

Main beam hea

Engine manage

Glow plug syste

Fault in brake s

applied

Right indicators

Cockpit66

g display*

be corrected as soon as possible if

Fig. 45 Display: system fault

Fig. 46 Display: warning message

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Exhaust emission control system

If the warning lamp lights up continuously you should take your vehicle to a

specialist garage as soon as possible in order to have the fault rectified.

If the warning lamp flashes drive on at reduced speed and seek professional

help in order to avoid damage to the catalytic converter.

For further information on the catalytic converter page 196.

Airbag system

This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension

device system.

The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

switched on.

If the warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up, flashes or flickers when

the vehicle is moving, this indicates a malfunction in the system.

WARNING

If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a specialist garage. Otherwise there is a risk that the airbag system and/or belt tensioners may not be triggered in an accident.

Tyre pressure monitorin

The tyre pressure should

it is too low.

Cockpit 67

Safety Fir Technical Data

hes when the indicators are operating

or trailer.

s when the indicators are operated if a trailer is

le.

s not work, either on the trailer or on the towing

ill not flash.

(ABS)

itors the ABS and the integrated elec-

EDL).

p for a few seconds when the ignition is

gine is being started. The lamp goes out again

ugh an automatic test sequence.

t light up when the ignition is switched on,

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

he normal way (except that the ABS control func-

ake the vehicle to a specialist garage as soon as

ion on the ABS page 190.

in the ABS, the ESP warning lamp will also light

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The yellow warning lamp remains on if the system is faulty or if

the pressure is too low in at least one tyre. In the event of a system

fault, the letters TPMS are displayed in the centre of the instrument

panel page 66, fig. 45. If the tyre pressure drops rapidly, the

message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display

of the instrument panel. If the pressure loss is more gradual, the

message page 66, fig. 46 will be shown on the central display

of the instrument panel. This message does not show the tyre

affected. Should any of these warnings be displayed:

Stop the engine.

Check the tyres. Although the warning corresponds to just one

tyre, you should also check the others.

Correct the tyre pressure page 243.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please

refer to page 242.

Cruise control system*

The indicator lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise

control system is operating.

Trailer indicators*

This indicator lamp flas

while towing a caravan

The indicator lamp flashe

correctly coupled to the vehic

Where a turn signal lamp doe

vehicle, the indicator lamp w

Anti-lock brake system

The warning lamp mon

tronic differential lock (

The warning lamp lights u

switched on and while the en

after the system has run thro

There is a fault in the ABS if:

the warning lamp does no

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still brake in t

tion is out of action). Please t

possible. For further informat

If a malfunction should occur

up.

AA

AB

Cockpit68

*

s a reminder to the driver to fasten

, the warning lamp will remain lit until the

applicable) have fastened their seat belts.

a certain speed, you will also hear a warning

ill flash.

seat belts, see page 22.

arning lights

al is operated, either the left or right indi-

ator lamps will flash when the hazard warning

icator lamp will start flashing twice as fast as

ing a trailer. Where a turn signal lamp does not

the towing vehicle, the indicator lamp will not

n the indicators, see page 123.

programme

itors the electronic stabilisation

following functions:

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Entire brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp

page 70 (with the handbrake released), this indicates not only a fault

in the ABS function, but probably also a malfunction in the main brake system

as well .

The symbol will light up in the instrument panel if a fault occurs in the brake system. Please refer to page 77.

Electronic differential lock (EDL) fault

The EDL works in conjunction with the ABS. The ABS indicator lamp will light

up to indicate an EDL fault. Please take the vehicle to a specialist garage

as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL page 191.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, observe the warning information in page 227, Work in the engine compart- ment.

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level has dropped below the "MIN" mark you must not drive on otherwise there may be an increased accident risk. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circum- stances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts a

the seat belt.

After switching on the ignition

driver and front passenger (if

When the vehicle has reached

signal and the warning light w

For further information on the

Indicators and hazard w

Depending on which turn sign

cator lamp flashes. Both indic

lights are switched on.

If one turn signal fails, the ind

normal.

This does not apply when tow

work, either on the trailer or on

flash. For further information o

Electronic stabilisation

This warning lamp mon

program (ESP).

The warning lamp has the

Cockpit 69

Safety Fir Technical Data

in the instrument panel lights up as well as the

driving page 78, stop the vehicle immedi-

e. In this case the coolant pump is no longer

isk of engine damage.

up when the main beams are on or when the

.

main beam headlights, see page 123.

itors the engine management system

nic Power Control) lights up while the function

hile the vehicle is moving, this indicates a fault

stem. The vehicle must be taken immediately to

e engine serviced.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable

driving condition.

It lights up when the ignition is switched on for approx. 2 seconds while

the function is checked.

The warning lamp will light up if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

It will light up after the battery has been disconnected.

The warning lamp will light up if the ESP is switched off.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP

operates in conjunction with the ABS.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this

may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP. In this

case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on

again. After this the warning lamp should go out to show that the system is

fully functional.

The warning lamp will light up when the ignition is switched on if the battery

has been disconnected and then reconnected. It should go out again after

driving a short distance if the steering wheel is turned slightly.

For further information on the ESP, see page 191.

Alternator

The warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator or in the

vehicle's electrical system.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should

switch off after the engine has started.

If the warning lamp lights up when you are driving, you can normally

continue as far as the nearest specialist garage. However, given that the

battery will be running down, any electrical consumption not absolutely vital

should be switched off.

Caution If the coolant warning lamp alternator waning lamp while

ately and switch off the engin

being driven, and there is a r

Main beam headlights

The indicator lamp lights

headlight flasher is operated

For further information on the

Engine management

This warning lamp mon

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electro

is being checked.

Note If the warning lamp lights up w

in the engine management sy

a specialist garage to have th

Cockpit70

ts up when the handbrake is applied. In addi-

rning page 76 switches on after driving for 3

m/h.

t and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 227, Work in the engine compart-

does not go out, or if it lights up when in the reservoir is too low and this may cause top the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain

lights up together with the ABS warning control function of the ABS is out of action. As lock relatively easily when braking. Under ar of the vehicle could suddenly sway from uent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the

have the fault rectified.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Glow plug system

The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are

preheating.

The indicator lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When

the indicator lamp goes out the engine should be started straight away. When

the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8C, the indicator

lamp will only light up very briefly.

Note If the glow plug indicator lamp should start flashing while the vehicle is

moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The engine

should be serviced without delay.

If the indicator lamp fails to light up when the ignition is switched on, this

can mean that the glow plug system is defective. The engine should be

serviced.

Brake system

The warning lamp flashes when the handbrake is applied, or

if the brake fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the ABS

system.

If the warning lamp flashes (and the handbrake is not applied), stop the

vehicle and check the brake fluid level page 237.

If a failure should occur in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will light up

together with the brake warning lamp .

Handbrake applied

The warning lamp also ligh

tion to this, the handbrake wa

seconds at a speed above 5 k

WARNING

Before opening the bonne the warning information in ment.

If the brake warning lamp driving, the brake fluid level an increased accident risk. S technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lamp, this can mean that the a result, the rear wheels can certain circumstances, the re side to side, with the subseq nearest specialist garage and

Cockpit 71

Safety Fir Technical Data

display will show a red or yellow warning

l indicates a serious malfunction page 77. A

tes a less serious malfunction page 79.

dio and telephone* page 72

y page 72

page 73

he 7-speed automatic gear- page 187

Multitronic* page 183

nce you can travel with the page 73

page 74

page 74

page 75

page 76

page 76

page 81

page 85

page 89

Separate operat-

ing instructions

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Driver information system

General notes

The driver information system in the instrument panel shows

the status of various on-board systems at a glance.

The display for the driver information system is in the centre of the instrument

panel.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. The DIS system gives an

audible warning if a fault should occur or if servicing is required, and a red or

yellow warning symbol (in some cases with a corresponding driver message)

appears in the dashboard display.

The driver is informed on the audio system.

The driver information system includes the following functions:

Note If a fault should occur, the

symbol. A red warning symbo

yellow warning symbol indica

Fig. 47 Cockpit: Digital display in the instrument panel

Display for the CD reader, ra

Ambient temperature displa

Gear indicator*

Selector lever positions for t

box*

Selector lever positions with

Distance to empty (the dista

remaining fuel)

Door catch/tailgate warning

Service interval display

auto-check control

Driving tips

Handbrake warning

Bulb monitor*

On-board computer*

Tyre pressure monitoring*

Navigation information*

Cockpit72

isplay

own in the display when the ignition is

icles with an automatic gearbox, the display

er has engaged a gear.

snowflake symbol appears next to the temper-

he driver to take extra care when there is a risk

ehicle is stationary or travelling at very low

layed may be slightly higher than the actual

ult of heat coming from the engine.

ioning and the display is changed over to F

ient temperature display automatically

5.

mperature display as an ice warning. Please e ice on the roads even at ambient tempera-

patches.

Fig. 49 Display: Ambient temperature display

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

CD, radio and telephone* display

If the radio is switched on and no Priority 2 faults are indicated by the auto-

check control, the OK symbol will go out and the display will show the name

or frequency of the selected radio station and various other information,

depending on the type of radio fitted.

When in CD mode*, the display will show the current track.

If you have a compatible telephone*, the phone book or telephone dialled

can also be seen on this display.

These displays appear in addition to the display on the radio itself.

Ambient temperature d

The ambient temperature is sh

switched on fig. 49. On veh

does not appear until the driv

At temperatures below +5C a

ature display. This is to warn t

of ice on the road. When the v

speeds, the temperature disp

ambient temperature as a res

If the vehicle has an air condit

(degrees Fahrenheit), the amb

changes over to F page 16

WARNING

Do not rely on the ambient te bear in mind that there may b tures of +5C beware of ice

Fig. 48 Display: addi- tional radio information

Cockpit 73

Safety Fir Technical Data

mend any gear-change while you are acceler-

he gear-change display deactivated by an

can help you to plan your trip.

isplayed in km. It shows how far the vehicle can

fuel left in the tank, assuming the same style of

layed in increments of 10 km.

n the basis of the fuel consumption over the last

will increase if you drive in a more economical

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Note When the display shows route guidance instructions from the navigation

system, the ambient temperature appears in the second line of the radio

display.

Gear display*

This display helps to save fuel.

Use the gear display to save fuel. The display in the instrument cluster

fig. 50 recommends that you select the gear indicated by the arrow. It may

also skip a gear, and recommend changing up from 4th gear to 6th gear, for

example.

Note The display may not recom

ating.

If desired, you can have t

Authorised Service Centre.

Fuel range

The fuel range display

The estimated fuel range is d

be driven with the amount of

driving. The fuel range is disp

The fuel range is calculated o

30 kilometres. The fuel range

manner.

Fig. 50 Gear display

Cockpit74

driver when the next routine service

rvice

tton briefly with the ignition switched on,

e vehicle can be driven before the next service

ed out with the engine stopped or running up

e first 500 km and after the ignition cycle, the

e service inspection are not displayed.

sed before the first 500 kms the following indi-

ith Extended Service Intervals*.

Fig. 52 Detail of the dash panel insert: Service indi- cator display

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Door catch/ tailgate warning

The door catch/tailgate warning symbol lights up if one or more of the doors,

or the bonnet or tailgate are not properly closed when the ignition is on. The

symbol also indicates which of these is not properly closed. The display in the

illustration fig. 51 shows that the front left door is open.

The corresponding part of the pictogram will flash if either the bonnet or tail-

gate are open. The warning symbol goes out when the bonnet, tailgate and

all the doors are closed.

On vehicles with a driver information system and an on-board computer* the

door catches/tailgate warning symbol can be switched off by briefly pressing

one of the control switches for the on-board computer page 86. However,

the warning symbol will appear again if any of the doors or the bonnet or tail-

gate is opened or closed.

Service indicator

This display reminds the

is due.

Displaying distance to next se

When you press the service bu

the display will show how far th

is due. This check can be carri

to speeds of 5 km/h. Before th

kilometres and days before th

If the service button is pres

cation appears on screen:

Service in ----- km --- days

This is also valid for vehicles w

Fig. 51 Display: door catch/tailgate warning

A1

Cockpit 75

Safety Fir Technical Data

ervice cannot be called up if the system has

symbol).

m

s important components and vehicle systems.

run constantly, as long as the ignition is

instrument panel if a fault should occur or if any

rgently required. This is accompanied by an

nding on the priority of the fault, a red or yellow

he display.

anger, whereas the yellow ones represent a

s to assist the driver may be shown with the red

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Service reminder

The instrument panel controls the distance travelled every day. Calculate the

average of these distances travelled and enable the service reminder suffi-

ciently in advance.

The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds. The

remaining distance to the next service is updated every time the ignition is

switched on, until the service becomes due.

Service due

When a service is due, SERVICE! will appear in the display immediately after

you switch on the ignition. The display reverts back to the standard display

after about 5 seconds.

Resetting the display

The display is reset by the garage after the service has been carried out. If the

service indicator has not been reset by the specialist garage, please perform

the following steps:

Switch the ignition off.

Press the service button page 74, fig. 52 and hold while switching

on the ignition. The display will show one of these messages: Service in ----- km or Service!

Now press and hold the reset button until the display shows Service in ----- km --- days or Service!

The display switches out of the reset mode if you do not press the reset button

within 5 seconds.

Note Do not reset the service indicator between services, otherwise the display

will be incorrect.

The information in the service indicator remains intact if the battery is

disconnected.

The distance to the next s

detected a Priority 1 fault (red

Auto-check syste

Introduction

The auto-check system check

These background checks are

switched on.

A message is displayed in the

maintenance or repairs are u

audible warning signal. Depe

warning symbol lights up in t

The red symbols indicate a d warning. Additional message

or yellow symbols.

A1

A2

Cockpit76

ymbols

pears in the display, it will automatically be

nding driver message.

displayed to indicate that the windscreen

dition, the following message will appear:

ter a few seconds. If required, the message can

ressing the button.

applied and When stationary apply footbrake e called up a second time. They will remain in

e is released or until a gear is selected.

.

e handbrake still applied, you will hear a

y will show the message:

es on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds

CHECK

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Driver messages

Additional messages to assist the driver are displayed

together with the warning symbols in the instrument panel.

Driver messages and red symbols

If a red warning symbol appears in the display, you can press the

button fig. 53 to call up an additional driver message.

For example: in the event of an oil pressure malfunction, the oil pressure

symbol will appear in the display. If you now press the button, the

following message will appear in the display:

Switch off engine, check oil level

The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds. If

required, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the

button.

Driver messages and yellow s

If a yellow warning symbol ap

accompanied by the correspo

For example, the symbol is

washer fluid level is low. In ad

Top up washer fluid

The message will disappear af

be called up again by briefly p

Note The messages handbrake while selecting gear cannot b

the display until the handbrak

Handbrake warning

Release the handbrake

If you drive by mistake with th

warning buzzer and the displa

Handbrake applied

The handbrake warning switch

above 5 km/h.

Fig. 53 Instrument panel: CHECK button

CHECK

CHECK

CHECK

Cockpit 77

Safety Fir Technical Data

indicate a Priority 1 fault (serious malfunction).

by three warning chimes. The symbols will keep

orrected. If several Priority 1 faults are detected

ls are displayed one after the other for about 2

m

em should be rectified as soon as

n the display, there is a fault in the brake

ing messages will appear in the display

ake fluid and hydraulic fluid levels

e system (ABS) Please visit garage

evel page 237.

ing lamp will light up together with the brake

.

et and checking the brake fluid level, observe page 227, Work in the engine compart-

the reservoir is too low, this could result in an btain technical assistance.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Red symbols

A red symbol warns of a danger.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

The red symbols are used to

A red symbol is accompanied

flashing until the faults are c

at the same time, the symbo

seconds.

Fault in the brake syste

A fault in the brake syst

possible.

If the symbol flashes i

system. One of the follow

together with the symbol:

Stop vehicle, check br

Warning! Fault in brak

Stop the vehicle.

Check the brake fluid l

If the ABS fails, the ABS warn

system fault symbol

WARNING

Before opening the bonn the warning information in ment.

If the brake fluid level in accident. Do not drive on. O

BRAKE

Fault in brake system page 77

COOLANT

Coolant level too low / coolant tem-

perature too high

page 78

OIL PRESSURE

Engine oil pressure too low page 78

Fig. 54 Display: Coolant level warning

Cockpit78

lights up as well page 69, it is possible that

has come on to indicate a fault in the cooling

sk of engine damage.

low

e is too low the fault must be rectified

n the display, the oil pressure is too low.

l appear in the display together with the

k oil level

vel page 230.

istance if necessary.

w, add more oil page 230.

the engine oil level is correct, obtain profes-

on. Do not continue to run the engine, even at

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp, this can mean that the control function of the ABS is out of action. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.

Fault in the cooling system

Faults in the cooling system must be rectified immediately.

If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the

coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The

following message will appear in the display together with the

symbol:

Switch off engine and check coolant level

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the coolant level page 232.

Add more coolant if necessary page 233.

Wait for the symbol to go out before driving on.

Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction

of the radiator fan.

If the alternator warning lamp

the drive belt has broken.

Caution Do not drive on if the symbol system, otherwise there is a ri

Engine oil pressure too

If the engine oil pressur

immediately.

If the symbol flashes i

The following message wil

symbol:

Switch off engine, chec

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the engine oil le

Obtain professional ass

Engine oil level too low

If the engine oil level is too lo

Engine oil level correct

If the symbol flashes and

sional assistance. Do not drive

idle speed.

WARNING (continued)

Cockpit 79

Safety Fir Technical Data

dicate a Priority 2 fault (warning).

nied by one warning chime. The function indi-

oon as possible. If several Priority 2 faults are

e symbols are displayed one after the other for

faulty* page 80

filter* obstructed page 80

sensor faulty page 80

page 80

page 81

t range control* faulty page 81

dlights* faulty page 81

l low* page 81

* page 81

o high or too low* page 81

page 81

nitoring system* page 89

nitoring system*

ble

page 66

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Note The oil pressure warning lamp is not an indicator for the oil level. The oil

level should therefore be checked regularly, preferably every time you fill the

tank.

Yellow symbols

A yellow symbol indicates a warning.

Yellow symbols are used to in

Yellow symbols are accompa

cated should be checked as s

detected at the same time, th

about 2 seconds at a time.

Brake light failure warning light page 80

Fuel level low page 80

Check engine oil level page 80

Fig. 55 Display: Fuel level low

Engine oil sensor

Diesel particulate

Light sensor/ rain

Brake pad worn

Speed warning 1

Dynamic headligh

Self-directing hea

Washer fluid leve

Speed warning 2

Battery voltage to

Bulb monitor*

Tyre pressure mo

Loss of pressure

TPMS Tyre pressure mo

System not availa

Cockpit80

at approximately 2000 rpm. The increase in

oot in the filter. When cleaning is successful,

not go off, take the vehicle to a specialist

diesel particulate filter, see page 197.

your speed to suit the weather, road, terrain commended driving speed must never lead to affic regulations.

or faulty

/ automatic wipers faulty

means that the light sensor / rain sensor is not

e dipped beam headlights will then be

n the light switch is set to the AUTO position.

he lights on and off in the normal way with the

is faulty, the functions operated via the wind-

available. You should have the light sensor /

ialist garage as soon as possible.

ve the front brake pads (and, for safety's sake,

d by a specialist garage.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Brake light failure

This warning light will appear on the upper part of the display if any of the

brake lights has failed. A text message in the central part of the display indi-

cates which brake light has failed (left or right).

Fuel level low

When this symbol comes on for the first time, there are about 8 to 10 litres

of fuel left in the tank. You should fill up as soon as possible page 222.

Check engine oil level

If the symbol lights up, please check the engine oil level as soon as

possible page 230. Top up the oil at the next opportunity page 230.

Engine oil sensor defective*

If the symbol lights up, take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have

the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level

every time you fill up with fuel page 230.

Diesel particulate filter obstructed

If the symbol lights up, you may be able to contribute towards automatic

filter cleaning by driving in the right manner. To do this, drive about 15

minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range) at a speed of 60

km/h, with the engine running

temperature will burn off any s

the symbol switches off.

If the light on symbol does

garage to repair the fault.

For further information on the

WARNING

It is essential that you adjust and traffic conditions. The re the driver disregarding the tr

Light sensor/ rain sens

Automatic headlights

If the symbol appears, this

working. For safety reasons, th

switched on permanently whe

However, you can still switch t

light switch. If the rain sensor

screen wiper lever will still be

rain sensor checked by a spec

Worn brake pads

If the symbol lights up, ha

the rear pads as well) inspecte

Cockpit 81

Safety Fir Technical Data

is means you are exceeding the speed that has

uce your speed accordingly page 82.

h or too low

ke the vehicle to a specialist garage and have

hether the alternator warning lamp has come on

s whether the lights on the vehicle are

, or if one of the lights has failed for any reason,

ill appear in the display together with an addi-

ut after 5 seconds). For instance, if the rear left

e display in the instrument panel will show the

r 5 seconds. Press the CHECK button briefly if

ge again.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Speed warning 1

If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has

been pre-set with the speed warning function. You should reduce your speed

accordingly page 82.

Headlight range control faulty

This symbol indicates a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range

control. Take the vehicle to a specialist garage to have the dynamic headlight

range control function repaired.

Self-directing headlights* faulty

Self-directing headlights faulty

This symbol indicates that the self-directing headlight system is faulty.

Take the vehicle to a specialist garage to have the headlights or the self-

directing headlight control unit repaired.

Washer fluid level low

If the symbol lights up, top up the fluid for the windscreen washer and

headlight washer system* page 234.

Speed warning 2

If the symbol lights up, th

been pre-set. You should red

Battery voltage too hig

If the symbol lights up, ta

the following items checked:

Ribbed belt

Battery condition

It is also advisable to check w

page 69.

Bulb monitor

The bulb monitor check

working.

If a defective bulb is detected

the bulb monitor symbol w

tional message (which goes o

turn signal is not working, th

following message:

Left rear turn signal

The message disappears afte

you wish to call up the messa

Cockpit82

tion can help prevent you exceeding

imum speed.

ill warn the driver if a pre-set maximum speed

an audible warning signal if the set speed is

warning symbol will also appear in the display

s two different warning speeds, which operate

tly different purposes:

e maximum speed can be changed while

as been set remains stored until the ignition is

ged or cleared.

Fig. 56 Display: Speed warning function

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If the display indicates that one of the lights is not working, this can have a

number of causes:

Bulb failure page 264.

A blown fuse page 262, Changing fuses.

Faulty electrical wiring.

Have the components replaced or the wiring repaired as necessary by a

specialist garage.

WARNING

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge lamps* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

Speed warning

Introduction

The speed warning func

a particular pre-set max

The speed warning function w

is exceeded. The system gives

exceeded by about 10 km/h. A

fig. 56.

The speed warning function ha

independently and serve sligh

Speed limit warning 1

With speed limit warning 1, th

driving. The speed limit that h

switched off, or until it is chan

Cockpit 83

Safety Fir Technical Data

rning 1

o set speed limit warning 1.

aximum speed.

n and hold it down until the symbol

ears.

inimum of 5 km/h.

n for at least two seconds.

lights up briefly in the display when the button

e selected speed has been stored. The speed

emains stored until another speed is selected

Fig. 57 Detail of the dash panel insert: CHECK button

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 1 page 82, fig. 56

will appear in the display if you exceed the pre-set speed. It goes out again if

the speed is reduced below the set speed limit.

The symbol also goes out if the speed is increased to more than about 40

km/h above the set speed for at least 10 seconds. However, this does not

cancel the speed limit that was originally set.

Setting speed limit warning 1 page 83.

Speed limit warning 2

With speed limit warning 2, the speed limit can only be changed or cleared

when the ignition is switched off. You are recommended to store this speed

limit warning if you always wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit.

This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if a

particular speed should not be exceeded when winter tyres are fitted etc.

The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 2 will appear in the

display if you exceed the pre-set speed. Unlike speed limit warning 1, the

warning symbol only goes out once the road speed has dropped below the

set value again.

Setting speed limit warning 2 page 84.

Note Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still

important to keep a eye on the car's speed with the speedometer and to

observe the legal speed limits.

Setting speed limit wa

Use the CHECK button t

Setting the speed limit

Drive at the desired m

Press the CHECK butto

page 82, fig. 56 app

Clearing the speed limit

Drive the vehicle at a m

Press the CHECK butto

The speed warning symbol is released to confirm that th

limit that has been selected r

Cockpit84

it, press the top or bottom of the function

indscreen wiper lever fig. 58. The

ill then increase or decrease by 10 km/h

button in the instrument cluster

distance display and the digital clock

for at least two seconds. The display will

hich is currently set.

Reset button on the windscreen wiper

l the crossed out warning symbol for

n the display.

leage recorder and digital clock goes off again

is released.

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

with a brief push of the button, or until the memory is cleared with a long

push of the button.

Setting speed limit warning 2

Speed limit warning 2 is set using the switches on the wind-

screen wiper lever.

Setting the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK button in the instrument cluster

page 83, fig. 57. The distance display and the digital clock

will light up.

Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds. The display will

show the speed limit which is currently set or, if no speed limit

has been set, the crossed out warning symbol for speed limit 2.

To change the speed lim

selector switch on the w

speed limit displayed w

at a time.

Clearing the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK

page 83, fig. 57. The

will light up.

Press the CHECK button

show the speed limit w

Now press and hold the

lever fig. 58 unti

speed limit 2 appears o

The display lighting for the mi

a few seconds after the buttonFig. 58 Windscreen wiper lever: Function selector switch

AB

Cockpit 85

Safety Fir Technical Data

oard computer 1)

rocesses the information on a journey from the

on until it is switched off. If the journey is

ter the ignition is switched off, the new figures

the calculation. If the journey is interrupted for

d information is automatically erased when you

ard computer 2)

mory, the total-journey memory is not erased

n determine the period for which you wish the

figures.

isplayed in km. The fuel range is displayed in

e fuel consumption since the memory was last

tion

taneous fuel consumption in litres/100 km.

y, the computer will display the last value in the

e speed driven since the memory was last

of time which has elapsed since the memory

st possible period it can cover is 999 hours and

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

On-board computer

Introduction

The on-board computer provides you with useful information

during a journey, including average and current fuel

consumption, average speed, fuel range, driving time and

distance covered.

Press RESET button page 86, fig. 60 to switch back and forward

between the functions of on-board computers 1 and 2.

The numbers in the display fig. 59 indicates which of the two memories is

currently in use. The figure 1 means that the display is showing the informa-

tion in the single journey memory (on-board computer 1). The figure 2 means

that the display is showing the information in the total journey memory (on-

board computer 2).

Single-journey memory (on-b

The single-journey memory p

time the ignition is switched

resumed within two hours af

are automatically included in

more than two hours the store

resume your journey.

Total-journey memory (on-bo

Unlike the single-journey me

automatically. Hence, you ca

on-board computer to supply

Fuel range

The estimated fuel range is d

increments of 10 km.

Average fuel consumption

This mode shows the averag

cancelled in litres/100 km.

Instantaneous fuel consump

The display shows the instan

When the vehicle is stationar

memory.

Average speed

This mode shows the averag

cancelled (in km/h).

Driving time

This display shows the period

was last cancelled. The longe

59 minutes.

Fig. 59 On-board computer: memory 1

AB

Cockpit86

is controlled by means of two

een wiper lever.

puter

repeatedly until the on-board

2) page 85, fig. 59 is displayed.

of the function selector switch

the functions of the on-board computer

et button for at least two seconds.

set to zero using the Reset button:

Fig. 60 Windscreen wiper lever: On-board computer controls

B

AA

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Driving time warning

After 2 hours of continuous driving, the display automatically switches over

to the driving time display of 2:00. At the same time the driving time display

starts flashing. This is to remind the driver to take a break.

The driving time warning can be switched off by briefly pressing the function

selector switch or the button fig. 60.

If you continue driving or take a break for less than 10 minutes, the driving

time warning will switch on once again when the total driving time is 4:00

hours, 6:00 hours, etc. However, if you take a break for more than 10 minutes,

the driving time warning clock will be erased.

Distance covered

This display shows the distance you have covered since the memory was last

cancelled. The longest possible distance which can be recorded is

9999.9 km.

Note The displays for fuel consumption (average and instantaneous), fuel

range and speed are shown in metric units.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

Operating

The on-board computer

switches on the windscr

Enabling the on-board com

Press the reset button

computer (memory 1 or

Selecting the function

Press the top or bottom

fig. 60. This displays

in sequence.

Resetting to zero

Press and hold the Res

The following values can be re

Reset

A

Cockpit 87

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 61 Windscreen wiper lever: Menu selection button

Fig. 62 Display: Main menu

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Journey duration

Distance covered

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

The on-board computer can only be operated when the ignition is switched

on. When the ignition is switched on, the display shows the function that was

last selected.

As well as the figures from the on-board computer (computer 1 or 2), the

display can also show information from the navigation system*. Press the

Reset button briefly to switch back and forward between these displays.

Note If you keep the Reset button pressed for longer than two seconds, it will

reset the currently displayed figure to zero (for instance average fuel

consumption).

Faults detected by the auto-check control will be displayed even if the

display is off.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

Menu display

Introduction

AB

Cockpit88

ed up via the button and the

dscreen wiper lever. Use these

and adjust the settings.

fig. 63 and the rocker switch :

until the menu display page 87,

to select one of the menus. Press "up" or

select the options accordingly.

.

Reset

Fig. 63 Windscreen wiper lever: Reset button and rocker switch

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Some of your vehicle's functions can be adjusted, activated and controlled by

menus. With the aid of the menus you can then also select the information

you wish to see displayed on the DIS display. This is only possible when the

ignition is on. The menu is enabled using the button on the wind-

screen wiper lever page 87, fig. 61.

The main menu lists the different display types (or basic commands):

Programming

Check

Menu off

Help

The main menu options have the following submenus:

Controlling the menu

The menu display is call

rocker switch on the win

controls to make checks

Functions of the

Enabling the menu

Press the button

fig. 62 appears.

Selecting and setting

Press the rocker switch

"down" on the switch to

Entering and confirming

Press the button

Programming Clock page 88

Computer page 88

Speed warning page 82

Radio info (on/off)

Units: for measuring dis-

tance, fuel consumption and

temperature

page 88

Language: you can select

one of 6 languages.

page 88

Check Service page 74

Menu off When the menu is switched off, the display shows the

same information as on vehicles without the menu func-

tion.

Help The help function may be used to understand the meaning

of symbols that can appear on different menus.

Reset

Reset AB

Reset

Reset

Cockpit 89

Safety Fir Technical Data

will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only

n they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

nvironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

g that the tyres are correctly inflated remains

n only provide assistance.

sted when the tyres are at ambient

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Use the rocker switch to select the menus and adjust various values. The

selected values are highlighted on a red background.

By pressing the button, you can confirm the option you have selected

or the value you have set. Selected functions are marked with a tick.

The following symbols are used:

Tyre pressure monitoring*

Introduction

The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the

pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of

symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system works

with the help of the ABS sensors in the wheels.

Please bear in mind that the tyre inflation pressure is also influenced by the

temperature of the tyre. Tyre pressure increases about 0.1 bar for each 10C

in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being

driven and the tyre pressure

adjust the tyre pressures whe

temperature).

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres lead to in

Note Responsibility for ensurin

with the driver; the system ca

Pressure can only be adju

temperature.

Cursor Function selected Red background (active

function)

Tick Selected

Box Not selected

Triangle pointing upwards Previous page

Triangle pointing down-

wards

Next page

Reset

Cockpit90

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Tyre pressure monitoring display

The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if

it is too low.

If the symbol appears, the tyre pressure on at least one of the

wheels is too low.

Stop the vehicle.

Check the tyre(s).

Correct the tyre pressure page 243.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please

refer to page 242.

Steering wheel controls 91

Safety Fir Technical Data

y pressing or scrolling the controls to on

heel fig. 64:

repeatedly to switch between modes, which

er information system fig. 65.

humbwheel to select a function from one of

* for the on-board phone system is enabled by

Pressing the talk button again disables speed

el up/down to raise/lower the volume as

Fig. 65 Driver informa- tion system

AA AD

B

AA

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Steering wheel controls

The multi-function steering wheel

Introduction

You can use the multi-function steering wheel to quickly and

easily operate selected functions of the radio, CD, and tele-

phone*.

The functions are operated b

the multi-function steering w

Press the button

are then displayed in the driv

Scroll and press the left t

the menus.

The speech control system

pressing the talk button .

control*.

Scroll the right thumbwhe

desired.

Fig. 64 Controls on the multi-function steering wheel

MODE A

AC

Steering wheel controls92

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Steering wheel audio version controls

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode

Station search.

Increase frequency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

One long press:

block the steering-

wheel controls

Short press:

activates the steer-

ing-wheel controls (if

they are blocked /

without specific func-

tion (if they are not

blocked)

No function

specified CD/

iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode

Next track Previous track Fast forward

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls 93

Safety Fir Technical Data

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down MUTE

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

Change to

phone

Enable voice

recognition

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward

Phone mode Next name in

phone book

Previous name in

phone book Accept

Change to

radio / CD /

iPod-USB /

MP3

Incoming call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

One press: accept

call.

Held down: reject

call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Active call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified End call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Voice activa- tion mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

No function speci-

fied

No function

specified Cancel

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls94

+ - Press

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

olume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System* version

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

No specified

function

No function

specified

V

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

V

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward V

AA AB AC

Steering wheel controls 95

Safety Fir Technical Data

+ - Press

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of

the last naviga-

tion order (only

if active)

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System + Telephone* version

(Mode) (PTT)+ - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase fre-

quency

Station search.

Decrease fre-

quency

1st press: starts

the search.

2nd press: cancels

the search

Change to

phone

Enable voice

recognition

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next

track.

iPod/USB Mode:

next track

CD mode: previ-

ous track.

iPod/USB Mode:

previous track

CD mode: fast for-

ward.

iPod/USB Mode:

fast forward

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward

Phone mode Next name in

phone book

Previous name in

phone book Accept

Change to

radio / CD /

iPod-USB /

MP3

Incoming call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

One press: accept

call.

Held down: reject

call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Active call mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified End call

No function

specified

No function

specified

Voice activa- tion mode

No function spec-

ified

No function

specified

No function speci-

fied

No function

specified Cancel

AA AB AC

Unlocking and locking96

our vehicle consists of the following items:

ontrol.

k and unlock the car and start the engine. Press

arrow- to unfold the key out of the handle and

ct the Technical Service. Have the remote

abled. You should therefore bring the plastic

with you. It is also important to notify your

the plastic key tab has been lost.

Fig. 67 Remote control key: Release button

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Unlocking and locking

Remote control keys

Set of keys

The set of keys belonging to y

one remote control key.

one key without remote c

a plastic key tab*.

Remote control key

The remote control key will loc

the release button fig. 67 -

to fold it back in.

Replacing a key

If you lose a key, please conta

control coding for that key dis

key tab* and all available keys

insurance company if a key or

Fig. 66 Set of keys supplied with the vehicle

AA

AB

AC

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Data

(arrow) flashes when one of the buttons is

does not light up or flash, this means that the

st be replaced.

ge 97.

ery

the batteries changed in a specialist

ange the used battery yourself, follow the

e key fig. 69 and the cover

irection of the arrow.

Fig. 69 Master key: Opening the cover

AA AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the car, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries.

Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock! Otherwise, the steering lock could engage suddenly, causing an accident.

Indicator light on the remote control key

The condition of the battery in the remote control key is moni-

tored by the indicator light.

Condition of the key battery

The indicator light fig. 68

pressed. If the indicator light

battery is exhausted and mu

Replacing the batteries pa

Replacing the key batt

We recommend you have

garage. If you decide to ch

steps below:

Carefully prise apart th

using a coin.

Remove cover in the d

Fig. 68 LED on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking98

rted using an original SEAT key with the correct

tart the engine with the key if there is another

ake of vehicle on the same key tab.

m enables you to lock and unlock all

nd the tank flap together.

your vehicle locks and unlocks all the doors

sly. The tailgate is unlocked when the vehicle

le must be used to open it. The vehicle can be

e remote control page 105 or by turning the

oor.

ally opened or closed using the central locking

roof* can be closed but not opened using the

ombined with an anti-theft security system. If

ey from the outside, the interior opening levers

unauthorised persons from entering the

tem fail to work, you can still normally enable

uel tank flap can be released manually if neces-

tank flap page 223.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Remove the used battery from the cover.

Insert the new battery. Make sure that the + symbol on the

battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is indicated on

the cover.

After inserting the battery, align the cover and key and press the

two parts together.

For the sake of the environment Used batteries must be disposed of appropriately and must not be discarded

with ordinary household waste.

Note The system must be re-synchronised after each battery replacement to be

able to lock and unlock the car using the remote control page 107.

The new battery must be of the same type as the original.

Electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser is designed to prevent unauthor-

ised persons from starting up the vehicle.

There is an electronic chip inside the key which automatically deactivates the

immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock. The electronic

immobiliser is enabled automatically when the ignition key is removed from

the ignition lock after coming to a stop.

If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE will appear in the trip recorder

display.

Note The engine can only be sta

code.

It may not be possible to s

ignition key from a different m

Central locking

Description

The central locking syste

the doors, the tailgate a

The central locking system on

and the tank flap simultaneou

is opened. However, the hand

locked and unlocked using th

key in the lock in the driver's d

The windows can also be centr

system page 111. The sun

central locking system.

The central locking system is c

the vehicle is locked with the k

stop working, which prevents

vehicle.

Should the central locking sys

all the locks individually. The f

sary. For manual release of the

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Data

ith the key

urn the key in the driver's door to position

n the door.

ors, the tailgate and the tank flap simultane-

tem will be disabled.

h the key

the key in the driver's door to position

and the tailgate.

Fig. 70 Turning the key to enable the open and close functions

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)*

The Auto Lock* function automatically locks all doors and the tailgate when

the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h.

The vehicle is unlocked again automatically when the ignition key is

removed. Alternatively, the driver can also unlock the vehicle using the

central locking switch or by opening one of the doors.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) inside the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note Should the central locking system fail to work, you can still lock and

unlock the driver's door and the tailgate using the key. For manual release of

the tank flap page 223. Locking the doors manually if central locking fails

to work page 102.

The anti-theft mechanism and the anti-theft alarm* cannot be enabled if

the central locking is not working.

Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.

Unlocking the vehicle w

To unlock the vehicle, t

fig. 70.

Pull the handle to ope

This will unlock all the do

ously.

The anti-theft security sys

Locking the vehicle wit

To lock the vehicle, turn

fig. 70 .

This will lock all the doors

AA

Unlocking and locking100

locked using the central locking system when

be locked separately after it has been closed.

being locked out of the vehicle.

m can be enabled from inside the

l locking switch on the driver's door.

button.

n using the central locking switch to lock your

Fig. 71 Detail of driver door: Central locking switch

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The interior lights are switched off, provided the light switch is in the cour-

tesy light position.

The windows and the sun roof* will close as the key is held in the locking

position.

The anti-theft security system will be enabled immediately.

Locking the vehicle without enabling the anti-theft security system

With the anti-theft security system enabled, it is more difficult to break into

the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system has been enabled, the inside

door handles and the central locking switch will not work .

If you are leaving passengers in the vehicle while it is parked, it is possible to

lock the vehicle without enabling the anti-theft security system.

To do so, turn the key in the driver's door twice in quick succession to position

page 99, fig. 70.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Caution If the driver's door is locked using the key while open, the car will be automat-

ically immobilised and the alarm triggered.

Note Please note that when the vehicle is locked without enabling the anti-

theft mechanism, the anti-theft alarm* remains operative. You should there-

fore switch off the interior monitor* before locking the vehicle, as otherwise

the alarm* could be triggered unintentionally.

The driver's door cannot be

it is still open. The door must

This helps to prevent you from

Central locking switch

The central locking syste

vehicle using the centra

Locking the vehicle

Press the fig. 71

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button.

Please note the following whe

vehicle:

AB

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Data

g*

king feature allows you to only unlock

e tank flap. All other doors and the

or and tank flap

e unlock position, or press the unlock

ontrol once.

he tailgate and the tank flap

in five seconds, or press the unlock button

twice within five seconds.

nti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you

without unlocking the other doors

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The doors and the tailgate cannot be opened from the outside (for secu-

rity reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside

door handle.

When the driver's door is open, it cannot be locked by pressing the central

locking switch and then closing the door. This helps to prevent you from

being locked out of the vehicle. The door has to be locked separately after it

has been closed.

In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked from

the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

WARNING

The central locking switch is still operative when the ignition is switched off. This switch can be used to automatically lock all the doors and the tail- gate. However, since this makes it difficult to enter the car from the outside, you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note The central locking switch inside the vehicle will not be operative if the anti-

theft mechanism has been enabled.

Security central lockin

The security central loc

the driver's door and th

tailgate remain locked.

Unlocking the driver's do

Turn the key once to th

button on the remote c

Unlocking all the doors, t simultaneously.

Turn the key twice with

on the remote control

The security system and the a

unlock only the driver's door,

page 107.

Unlocking and locking102

nly visible when the door is open) is

enger's door and the rear doors.

o turn the cap slightly and then fold it

lot inside fig. 73 and turn it as far as

egrees to the right (doors on right side)

e left side).

d it can no longer be opened from the outside.

the inside by pulling the door handle. If the

n one of the rear doors, the door can be opened

dle once and then opening the door from the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to work

Should the central locking system fail to work at any time (for

instance if there is no electrical power supply), each door will

have to be locked separately.

A manual locking device (o

provided on the front pass

Open the door.

Use the key fig. 72 t

downwards.

Insert the key into the s

the stop, i.e. about 90 d

or to the left (door on th

Once the door has been close

The door can be opened from

child-proof catch is engaged o

by pulling the inside door han

outside.

Fig. 72 Manual locking device

Fig. 73 Enabling manual locking

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Data

, always check that the catch has engaged ld open while driving, even if it has been

be completely closed when the vehicle is aust fumes may be drawn into the vehicle.

arning symbol lights up in the instrument

roperly closed when the ignition is switched on

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Tailgate

Tailgate: opening and closing

Opening the tailgate

Pull on the release lever fig. 74 and lift the tailgate at the same

time.

Then lift up the tailgate. If your vehicle is equipped accordingly,

the tailgate will open automatically*.

Closing the tailgate

Pull down the tailgate and let it drop into the latch .

Use the recessed handle in the interior trim to make it easier to pull down the

tailgate.

WARNING

After closing the boot lid properly. If not, the boot cou locked. Risk of accident!

The tailgate must always moving, otherwise toxic exh Danger of poisoning!

Note The door catch/boot lid w

cluster if the boot lid is not p

page 74.

Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking104

ckrests fig. 75.

ompartment.

-arrow-.

nto the opening fig. 76 -arrow- and

of the arrow in order to release the

r doors

ents the rear doors from being

A1

Fig. 77 Childproof lock on the rear doors

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Unlocking the tailgate manually

The tailgate can be released manually if it will not open in the

normal way.

Fold down both rear ba

Lean into the luggage c

Lift the cover fig. 76

Insert the screwdriver i

push it in the direction

tailgate.

Childproof locks

Childproof locks on rea

The childproof lock prev

opened from the inside.

Fig. 75 Detail of the rear seats and luggage compartment: access to the emergency release mechanism

Fig. 76 Detail of the tail- gate: emergency unlocking mechanism

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Data

tances. The range is reduced when the battery

tes a foldaway key that can be used to manually

well as to start the engine.

red or replaced, or if a replacement key is used,

amming by a specialist garage. Only then will

ontrol again.

relevant authorisation requirements and has

l Approvals Office for Telecommunications of the

All components are marked in accordance with

ts. This certification forms the basis for official

ntries.

matically disabled when the ignition is

e control may be impaired by interference from

.g. from a mobile phone or TV transmitter) if

ncy range.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The rear doors are equipped with childproof locks. These can be

operated using the ignition key. The childproof locks are only visible

with the doors open.

Enabling the childproof lock

Turn the key in the direction of the arrow page 104, fig. 77.

Disabling the childproof lock

Turn the key in the opposite direction of the arrow.

When the childproof lock is enabled, the inside door handle will not work and

the door can only be opened from the outside.

Remote control key

Description

The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle

without having to insert the key in the lock.

The following functions are available:

Locking and and unlocking the vehicle

Unlocking the tailgate

All the indicators will flash as confirmation when the vehicle is locked or

unlocked. Furthermore, the interior lights will automatically light up when the

vehicle is unlocked and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that the

switches are in the courtesy light position.

The remote control transmitter and the battery are integrated into the handle

of the key. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range

depends on different circums

starts to lose power.

The remote control incorpora

lock or unlock the vehicle, as

If the receiver has been repai

the system will need re-progr

you be able use the remote c

The remote control meets all

been approved by the Federa

Federal Republic of Germany.

the current legal requiremen

approval for use in other cou

Note The remote control is auto

switched on.

The function of the remot

other nearby radio signals (e

these are in the same freque

Unlocking and locking106

entral locking* feature, you can unlock just the

by pressing button once or the whole

twice.

the vehicle is locked to confirm that the doors

d.

g the vehicle, the seat* and mirror* memory

ated. The driver's seat and exterior mirrors will

he positions stored in the memory.

ically light up when the vehicle is unlocked and

ked, provided that the switch is in the courtesy

lly children) in the car if it is locked from the curity system is enabled, as the doors and ed from the inside. Locked doors could delay

potentially putting lives at risk.

only be used when the doors and the tailgate

not be used when the vehicle is out of sight.

e accidentally triggered and the vehicle locked

on the remote control inside the vehicle

ignition. If this should happen by mistake,

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button fig. 78 for about 1 second.

Locking the vehicle

Press button for about 1 second.

Opening the tailgate

Press button and hold for at least one second.

The indicators will flash twice as confirmation when you unlock the car. The

vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors

or the tailgate within 60 seconds after unlocking the car with button . This

function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking

button is pressed by mistake.

On vehicles with the security c driver's door and the tank flap

vehicle by pressing the button

The indicators flash once when

and tailgate are properly locke

Moreover, apart from unlockin

programmed in the key is activ

be automatically adjusted to t

The interior lights will automat

go out when the vehicle is loc

light position.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especia outside and the anti-theft se windows cannot then be open assistance in an emergency,

Note The remote control should

are closed.

The remote control should

The anti-theft alarm* can b

if you press the locking button

before inserting the key in the

press the unlock button .

Fig. 78 Remote control key: Control buttons

AA

AB

AC

AA

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Data

isabled when the vehicle is unlocked using the

ill lock again automatically if none of the doors

after pressing the remote control button.

urning the key in the driver's door, all the other

nk flap will remain locked.

ed with the key in the driver's door, the key must

k and the ignition switched on within 15

in order to disable the alarm. The alarm will be t switched on within 15 seconds.

r the alarm?

are monitored when the vehicle is locked:

net)

ction)

-fitted SEAT radio)

entered, the alarm will be triggered.

f by unlocking the vehicle using the remote

e ignition with the key, thus disabling the

also switch off when it comes to the end of its

hen the vehicle is locked to confirm that the

the tailgate are properly closed and locked.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Re-synchronising

Should the remote control fail to lock or unlock the vehicle,

the system must be re-synchronised.

If the vehicle is locked, use the key to unlock the driver's door.

Press the unlock button on the remote control.

Insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

Press the unlock or the lock button .

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The system triggers an alarm if anyone attempts to break into

the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm helps to prevent the vehicle being broken into or stolen.

If the system senses interference with the vehicle, it triggers an audible and

visible alarm.

How is the system enabled?

The anti-theft alarm system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is

locked with the remote control or by turning the key in the driver's door (if the

door is closed). The system is enabled about 30 seconds after the vehicle is

locked.

How is the system disabled?

The anti-theft alarm is only d

remote control. The vehicle w

is opened within 60 seconds

If the vehicle is unlocked by t

doors, the tailgate and the ta

If the vehicle has been unlock

be inserted in the ignition loc

seconds of opening the door

triggered if the ignition is no

When does the system trigge

The following parts of the car

Engine compartment (bon

Luggage compartment

Doors

Tilt angle (tow-away prote

Ignition

Radio (only with a factory

Interior page 108

If any of the named areas are

How is the alarm disabled?

The alarm can be switched of

control, or by switching on th

alarm system. The alarm will

cycle.

Indicators

The indicators flash briefly w

doors, the engine bonnet and

Unlocking and locking108

gers an alarm if it detects movement

erior monitor if there is a possibility that

d, e.g. by a pet or by an object moving

. The tow-away protection feature, which

system, should be disabled if the car is

d (e.g. by rail or ship).

itor

out the switch (with the symbol ) to

compartment, in the driver's door

Fig. 79 Interior monitor switch

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If the indicators do not flash, check the doors, the bonnet and the tailgate to

make sure they are properly closed. The indicators will also flash briefly if one

of the doors or the tailgate or engine bonnet are closed after the alarm system

has been enabled.

LED

When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver's door trim will

flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then continue flashing slowly. This is

to indicate that the anti-theft alarm system (including the interior monitor

and tow-away protection) is operative. If the LED lights up continuously for

about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked instead of flashing, this means

the alarm system is not working properly.

Note To make sure that the alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle,

briefly check that all the doors and windows and the sun roof* are closed.

The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

nected while the alarm system is enabled.

Interior monitoring*

The interior monitor trig

inside the vehicle.

You should disable the int

the alarm could be triggere

about inside the car is integrated into the alarm

being towed or transporte

Disabling the interior mon

Open the door and pull

one side of the storage

fig. 79.

Then lock the vehicle.

Unlocking and locking 109

Safety Fir Technical Data

driver's door window

enger's door window.

or window

oor window

you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only time. This is particularly important if there are

ight otherwise be able to start the engine or

Fig. 80 Detail of the driver's door: Control switches

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Disabling the tow-away protection

Open the door and pull out switch (with the symbol ) to one

side of the storage compartment, in the driver's door

page 108, fig. 79.

Then lock the vehicle.

The LED on switch will light up when the interior monitor is disabled. The

LED on the top of the driver's door trim will also light up for about 3 seconds.

When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver's door trim will

flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The interior monitor is automatically

enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.

The LED on switch will light up when the tow-away protection function is

disabled. The LED on the top of the driver's door trim will also light up for

about 3 seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the

driver's door trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The tow-away protec-

tion is automatically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the car if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Electric windows

Control switches

Switches for front windows

Switch fig. 80 for the

Switch for the front pass

Switches for rear windows

Switch for the rear left do

Switch for the rear right d

Safety switch

WARNING

Always take the key with intend to be gone for a short children in the car, as they m

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

Unlocking and locking110

, fig. 80 can deactivate the rear door

ly be operated from the rear when the safety

safety switch when the electric windows in the

h not pressed in).

ut ten minutes after the ignition has been

ches are only disabled when the driver's door

is opened.

senger's door and on the rear doors

a switch for its own window.

ontrolled by two-stage switches:

AE

Fig. 81 Switch on front passenger's door

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries. The window switches are only disabled when the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened.

Never close the windows carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner as this may cause bruising.

When locking the vehicle from the outside, make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the inside in an emergency.

Switches in the driver's door

The driver can operate all the electric windows in the vehicle.

The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the

window has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window

has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically close all the way.

Safety switch

The safety switch page 109

switches. The windows can on

switch is pressed in.

The symbol lights up on the

rear doors are disabled (switc

Note The windows will work for abo

switched off. The window swit

or the front passenger's door

Switch on the front pas

Each of these doors has

The electric windows are c

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 111

Safety Fir Technical Data

ng the ignition key

r with the key and hold the key in the

ll the windows are open.

g the remote control

k button until all windows are closed

g the ignition key

with the key and hold the key in the lock

indows are closed .

when you release the remote control button or

position in the door lock.

the windows to ensure nobody is hurt.

hould only use the remote control open and t 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, indows when pressing the button to close ving as soon as the button is released.

nction not working

e function will not work if the battery has been

e function can be restored as follows:

s it will go by lifting and holding the window

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the

window has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the window

has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will

automatically close all the way.

Note The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been

switched off. The window switches are only disabled when one of the front

doors is opened.

Opening and closing the windows using the central locking function

The windows can be opened or closed simultaneously when

the vehicle is unlocked or locked.

Opening the windows using the remote control

Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control until

the windows reach the desired position.

Opening the windows usi

unlock the driver's doo

unlock position until a

Closing the windows usin

Press and hold the loc

.

Closing the windows usin

Lock the driver's door

position until all the w

The windows will stop moving

turn the key back to its initial

WARNING

Be careful when closing

For safety reasons, you s close functions within abou always keep an eye on the w them. The windows stop mo

Possible malfunctions

Automatic open and close fu

The automatic open and clos

temporarily disconnected. Th

Close the window as far a

switch.

Unlocking and locking112

less wind noise if it is opened in the

ngages at position fig. 82. The sun

as far as the comfort setting which means

.

ion and hold it until the sun roof

ition. This position can cause more wind

tion .

Fig. 82 Details of head- liner: Rotary sun roof control

A1

A2

A0

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This will re-enable

the automatic function.

Sun roof / deflector*

Description

The sliding/tilting sun roof is operated using the rotary control fig. 82. The

rotary control for sliding the roof open can be adjusted to several different

settings (with click stops). This control only works when the ignition is

switched on. The rotary control must be in the position if you want to tilt

the roof up at the rear.

The sun roof will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been

switched off. However, it is immediately disabled when one of the front doors

is opened.

Sliding/Tilting

The sun roof will create

comfort setting.

Comfort setting

Turn the control until it e

roof will now only open

there is less wind noise

Opening completely

Turn the switch to posit

reaches the desired pos

noise.

Tilting open

Turn the control to posi

A0

Unlocking and locking 113

Safety Fir Technical Data

liding/tilting roof. There is a risk of suffering ys take out the ignition key when leaving the

on

e closed from outside the vehicle.

on the driver's door and hold it in the lock

ck button on the remote control until the

way .

unroof. There is a risk of suffering injury.

er the climate control fan.

the same way as the normal sliding/tilting sun

e solar roof and cannot be opened and closed

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

With the control in position 0, press the control briefly to make

the roof tilt open all the way.

To open the roof as far as an intermediate setting, press and hold

the control until the roof has moved to the desired position.

When you release the switch it will automatically spring back from position

to position .

The sliding sun blind in the headliner automatically opens when the sunroof

is slid open. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

It is advisable to close the sun blind when the vehicle is left standing in the

sun. It is important to remember to close the sunroof when parking the

vehicle or if it suddenly starts raining especially when the sun blind is

extended.

For further information on the automatic close function, see page 113.

Closing

Closing

Turn the control to position page 112, fig. 82 to close the

sunroof .

Closing the sunroof from the tilt position

Pull the specially formed rear end of the control and hold it until

the sunroof has moved down to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to lower the sunroof automatically to the

fully closed position. If required, the sunroof can be stopped in

any position by briefly pulling the control again .

WARNING

Take care when closing the s injury. For this reason, alwa vehicle.

Automatic close functi

The sun roof can also b

Turn the key in the lock

position or press the lo

roof has closed all the

WARNING

Take care when closing the s

Sunroof / deflector*

The solar cells in the roof pow

The solar roof is operated in

roof.

The interior trim is fixed to th

separately.

A2 A1

A0

Unlocking and locking114

nually

ed by hand if the electrical system

Fig. 83 Details of head- liner: Points for applying screwdriver

Fig. 84 Details of head- liner: Crank handle for manual operations

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Closing the sunroof by overriding the safety cut-out

It is possible to override the safety cut-out to close the

sunroof.

The sliding sunroof mechanism is equipped with a safety cut-out. If

the roof should fail to close normally, it can be closed by overriding

the safety cut-out.

Turn the control to position page 112, fig. 82.

Pull on the control switch until the roof closes.

WARNING

Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.

Closing the sunroof ma

The sunroof can be clos

should fail to operate.

A0

Unlocking and locking 115

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Carefully insert the flat end of a screwdriver (from the car's tool

kit) at the rear of the glass cover on the interior light page 114,

fig. 83.

Carefully lever off the glass cover.

Take the crank handle from its mounting on the inside of the fuse

box cover page 262.

Insert the crank handle all the way into the hexagonal socket

page 114, fig. 84.

Hold the crank handle in position and turn it to close the sun roof.

Reinstall the glass cover: insert the plastic lugs first and then

press the cover upwards.

Have the fault repaired.

Note You can use the screwdriver handle to make it easier to turn the crank. Detach

the handle from the screwdriver and then fit the handle onto the crank.

A1

A2

Lights and visibility116

ver forward page 123.

position O.

icles for countries where daytime running

vehicles with AFS headlights, daytime running

the ignition. Daytime running lights have main

ot the dipped-beam headlight function

ill only work with the ignition on. The head-

ed to side lights after the ignition has been

beam headlights are turned on, the symbol

lights switch.

the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

ver's door is opened.

ory requirements when using the lighting

ditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

ndicators may be temporarily misted. This does

lighting system. By switching on the lights, the

of light is projected will quickly be demisted.

nue to be misted up.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Lights and visibility

Lights

Lights: switching on and off

Switching on parking lights

Turn the light switch fig. 85 to position .

Switching on dipped or main beam headlights (driving lights)

Dipped headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Main beam headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Press the main beam le

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to

Daytime running lights: In veh

lights are obligatory and in all

lights are turned on or off with

beam flashers, as usual, but n

The dipped beam headlights w

lights are automatically switch

switched off.

If the side lights or the dipped-

will come on together with the

Note If the lights are left on after

a buzzer sounds when the dri

Observe all relevant statut

systems described here.

Depending on weather con

lights, the rear lights and the i

not affect the useful life of the

area through which the beam

However, the edges may conti

Fig. 85 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Light switch

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Data

hile using the automatic headlights function

ving through a tunnel), but do not disable them

headlights will come on the next time the lights

n. To be able to use the main beam headlights

main beam lever back to the "off" position and

"on".

g lights and rear fog light can still be switched

y by using the lights switch page 116.

is fitted with sensors that measure the ambient

lights will be switched on automatically if the

e factory preset value (for instance when driving

eadlights switch off again automatically when

.

am headlights are only intended to assist the am headlights do not relieve the driver of his ol them and turn off or turn on the lights manu- lighting conditions. The light sensors are, for in and fog - you should therefore always switch hts manually in these conditions and when

l requirements when using the signalling and here.

itching is activated, when the ignition is turned

hts are turned off, and when the key is removed

ts are turned off.

type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so

so could prevent the automatic dipped-beam

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Automatic headlight switch* (sensor-controlled)

If you set the light switch to AUTO, the headlights will switch

on and switch off automatically according to the ambient light

level.

Turning on dipped-beam headlights

Turn the light switch fig. 86 to the AUTO position.

Turning off dipped-beam headlights

Turn the light switch to position O.

The symbol on the switch lights up when the switch is in the AUTO position.

The dipped beams, side lights, rear lights and number plate lights come on

together when the headlights are switched on automatically.

When you are using the automatic headlights switch, you can also operate

the main beam headlights, however, please note the following: If you enable

the main beam headlights w

during the day (e.g. when dri

again, only the dipped beam

are automatically switched o

again, you must first pull the

then push it forward again to

The side lights, headlights, fo

on manually in the normal wa

The mirror inside the vehicle

light. The dipped-beam head

available light drops below th

through a tunnel, etc.). The h

the light level increases

WARNING

The automatic dipped-be driver. Automatic dipped-be or her responsibility to contr ally according to weather or example, unable to detect ra on the dipped-beam headlig driving after dark.

Observe all relevant lega lighting systems described

Note If automatic headlight sw

off the dipped-beam headlig

from the ignition the side ligh

If you have to attach any

in front of the sensors. Doing

Fig. 86 Detailed view of instrument panel: Light switch

Lights and visibility118

h page 116, fig. 85 to the position

witch to the second stop to switch on

the switch will light up when the rear fog light

avan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle

acket*, only the rear fog light on the trailer or

hind you, the rear fog light should only be used

ations.

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

headlight or anti-dazzle function from working correctly or even from working

at all.

The warning symbol will appear on the instrument panel if a malfunc-

tion occurs page 80.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and

lighting systems described here.

Front fog lights

The light switch can also be used to turn on the front fog

lights.

Switching on the front fog lights

Do page 116, fig. 85 not turn the light switch to the symbol

.

First turn the light switch to the position or .

Then pull the light switch out to the first stop .

The front fog light symbol next to the switch will light up when the front fog

lights are on.

Rear fog light

The light switch can also be used to turn on the rear fog light.

Do page 116, fig. 85 not turn the light switch to the symbol

.

First turn the light switc

or .

Then pull out the light s

the rear fog light.

The symbols and next to

is switched on.

If you are towing a trailer or car

with a factory-fitted towing br caravan will light up.

Caution To avoid dazzling the traffic be

in accordance with legal regul

A1

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Data

n to prevent the setting from being

lly.

home functions are controlled by light sensors

g. The system will function when the following

n 1.

nition are switched off.

ors register little or no light.

and it is dark, the corresponding exterior lights

er's door is opened.

n for up to a maximum of 2 minutes as long as

te is open.

about 30 seconds to light up the area in front of

the tailgate have been closed.

et, but you can have it changed by a specialist

irements (max. setting is 60 seconds).

ed on when the vehicle is unlocked with the

key.

n the driver's door is opened or after 60

ks itself again automatically page 106.

emove the key from the ignition, as the lights home is enabled. This will lead to battery down.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Coming home and leaving home functions*

The coming home and leaving home functions are used to

light up the surroundings in the dark. The front fog lights, the

rear side lights and the number plate light switch on.

Enabling the functions

Briefly press the knob fig. 87 to release it from its set position.

Turn the knob to position 1.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

Disabling the functions

Briefly press the knob fig. 87 to release it from its set position.

Turn the knob to position 0.

Press the knob in agai

changed unintentiona

The coming home and leaving

in the rear view mirror housin

requirements are met:

The knob is set to positio

The headlights and the ig

Dark conditions; the sens

Coming home

When the system is enabled

switch on as soon as the driv

The exterior lights will stay o

one of the doors or the tailga

The exterior lights stay on for

the car after all the doors and

This time interval is factory-s

garage to suit your own requ

Leaving home

The exterior lights are switch

button on the remote control

The exterior lights go out whe

seconds when the vehicle loc

WARNING

Before leaving the vehicle, r will not go out if the coming discharge and vehicle break

Fig. 87 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Coming home and leaving home functions

Lights and visibility120

ncrease the brightness.

duce the brightness.

lays will adjust automatically, depending on

hed on

switched on, the brightness of the instrument

onsole lighting can be varied by pressing the

eadlights are switched on, the range

adjusted to suit the load being

Fig. 89 Headlight range control

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Note If you always wish to use the coming home and leaving home functions,

you can leave them permanently switched on. As the system is controlled via

a light sensor, it will only work in dark conditions.

Permanent use of the coming home and leaving home functions, particu-

larly on short journeys, will increase the load on the battery. To make sure the

battery is always sufficiently charged, occasionally drive longer distances.

If the fog lights have been switched on by the coming home and leaving

home functions, they will always be switched off when you switch on the igni-

tion.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and

lighting systems described here.

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and

centre console lighting can be varied as required.

Press the button to i

Press the button to re

With the ignition switched on

The lighting of the digital disp

the ambient light.

With the vehicle's lights switc

When the vehicle's lights are

lighting, displays and centre c

and buttons.

Headlight range control

When the dipped beam h

of the headlights can be

carried.

Fig. 88 Instrument panel lighting

+

-

+ -

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Data

*

hts turn on automatically when the

fig. 90 to release it from its set position.

on 1.

n to prevent the setting from being

lly.

fig. 90 to release it from its set position.

on 0.

Fig. 90 Daytime running lights switch

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Briefly press the knob page 120, fig. 89 to release it from

its set position.

Turn the knob to the required setting.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

Settings

The settings roughly correspond to the following load conditions:

Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty

Full load of occupants, luggage compartment empty

Full load of occupants, luggage compartment loaded

Driver only, luggage compartment loaded

Caution Always adjust the headlights to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Make sure

you lower the headlights when the vehicle is more heavily laden.

Dynamic headlight range control

On vehicles with xenon gas-discharge bulbs, the headlights automatically

adapt to suit the load being carried when the ignition is switched on. The

headlights are also automatically adjusted when the vehicle is in motion (e.g.

when accelerating and braking).

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lig

ignition is switched on.

Enabling the functions

Briefly press the knob

Turn the knob to positi

Press the knob in agai

changed unintentiona

Disabling the functions

Briefly press the knob

Turn the knob to positi

AO

A1

A2

A3

Lights and visibility122

ives better illumination of the curve zone and

ing around a bend fig. 91. The dynamic

tomatically depending on the speed and the

are regulated automatically when you drive

how far you turn the steering wheel. The two

rent angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle

eed of about 10 km/h.

ts are used to draw the attention of

vehicle in emergencies.

Fig. 92 Centre console: Switch for hazard warning lights

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being

changed unintentionally.

This button activates or deactivates the daytime running lights function. With

the function activated, when the ignition is switched on the daytime running

lights are turned on automatically.

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Adaptive headlights* (for cornering)

When driving around bends, the headlights will light the

most important areas of the road.

The dynamic cornering light g

the side of the road when driv

cornering light is controlled au

steering wheel angle.

The dipped-beam headlights

around a bend, depending on

main headlights move at diffe

is left completely in the dark.

Note The system operates from a sp

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning ligh

other road users to your

Fig. 91 Self-directing headlights when driving

Lights and visibility 123

Safety Fir Technical Data

in beam headlight lever

in beam headlight lever also operates

the headlight flasher.

beam headlight lever has the following

ay up to indicate right or all the way down

3.

own just as far as the point of resistance

ndicators flash for as long as you hold the

n changing a lane).

p or down as far as the point of resistance

l briefly (the indicators flash three times).

Fig. 93 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Press the switch page 122, fig. 92 to switch the hazard

warning lights on or off.

All four indicators flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. The hazard warning light indication lamps and the turn

signal indication lamp itself flash at the same time. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

In an accident in which the airbags are triggered, the hazard warning lights

are switched on automatically.

Note You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, e.g.

When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam

If your vehicle breaks down or there is an emergency

If your vehicle is being towed away or if you are towing another vehicle

Indicator and ma

The turn signal and ma

the parking lights and

The turn signal and main

functions:

Indicators

Move the lever all the w

to indicate left fig. 9

Move the lever up or d

and hold it there: the i

lever (for instance whe

Move the lever briefly u

and release it to signa

Lights and visibility124

dlights or the headlight flasher if this would

glove compartment light

so incorporates the reading lights for

r.

. 94 for the front interior light has the

Fig. 94 Details of head- liner: front interior lights

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Main beam headlights

Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.

Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-

lights off again.

Headlight flasher

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.

Parking light

Switch the ignition off.

Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand

parking lights respectively.

Notes on these functions

The indicators only work when the ignition is switched on. The indicator

lamp or flashes in the instrument panel when the turns signals

page 65 are working.

The indicators are cancelled automatically when the steering wheel is

returned to the straight-ahead position.

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam

headlights are already on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then

comes on in the instrument panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever, even if no

other lights are switched on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp

then comes on in the instrument panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light

on one side of the car light up with reduced intensity. The parking lights will

only work with the ignition off.

Caution Never use the main beam hea

dazzle oncoming traffic.

Interior lights

Front interior lights and

The front interior light al

the driver and passenge

The rocker switch fig

following functions:

AA

Lights and visibility 125

Safety Fir Technical Data

automatically adjusted by a dimmer when they

g illuminates a number of minor

s come on automatically when the ignition is

creen* also comes on when the side lights or

he centre console is illuminated from above.

not be switched off manually.

Fig. 95 Details of head- liner: background lighting

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Door light position

Move switch to the centre position.

Interior light switched on

Move switch to position I.

Interior light switched off

Move switch to position O.

Front reading lights

Press one of the switches to turn the left and right reading

lights on and off.

Glove compartment light

Open the glove compartment on the front passenger's side. The

glove compartment light will come on automatically if the side

lights or headlights are switched on, and will go out again when

the glove compartment is closed.

Footwell* and door lighting

This is switched on when the doors are opened and off when they

are closed.

If the switch is in the courtesy light position, the interior light comes on auto-

matically when the vehicle is unlocked or the doors are opened. The light also

comes on when the key is pulled out of the ignition. The light turns off about

30 seconds after closing the doors. The interior light is switched off immedi-

ately when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

If a door is left open, the light is switched off after about 10 minutes to

prevent the battery from running flat.

The brightness of the lights is

are switched on.

Background lighting*

The background lightin

controls.

The lights in the door handle

switched on.

The lighting above the winds

headlights are switched on. T

The background lighting can

AA

AA

AA

AB

Lights and visibility126

lighting

f the luggage compartment.

n automatically when the tailgate is opened.

t is switched off automatically if the tailgate is

10 minutes.

Fig. 97 Detailed view of the top of the luggage compartment: luggage compartment lighting

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Rear reading lights

The reading lights are switched on and off with the switches .

Luggage compartment

The light is in the upper part o

The light fig. 97 switches o

The luggage compartment ligh

left open for more than about

Fig. 96 Details of head- liner: rear reading lights

Lights and visibility 127

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment dow as soon as the rear window has demisted.

u can also save fuel.

rove visibility and contribute to safety.

er and the front passenger can be pulled out of

of the vehicle and turned towards the doors

n visors have covers. On opening the cover ,

e headliner is automatically switched on. The

the cover is closed and when the sun visor is

Fig. 99 Sun visor

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Visibility

Heated rear window

The rear window heating clears the rear window of condensa-

tion.

Press button to switch the rear window heating on or off

fig. 98.

The rear window heating only works when the ignition is switched on. An indi-

cator lamp in the button lights up when the rear window heater is switched

on.

The heated rear window switches off automatically after about 10 minutes if

the outside temperature is above 0C.

Depending on the outside temperature, the wing mirrors are also heated

while the heated rear window is turned on.

For the sake of the e Switch of the heated rear win

By saving electrical power yo

Sun visors

The sun visors can imp

The sun visors for the driv

their mountings in the centre

fig. 99.

The make-up mirrors in the su

the mirror light* located in th

light switches itself off when

pushed back up.

Fig. 98 Switch for heated rear window

A1

Lights and visibility128

s

ver controls the windscreen wipers

and wipe.

r fig. 101 has the following settings:

position to give the windscreen a brief

n sensor* (enabling)

sition .

or down to set the wiper intervals.

Fig. 101 Windscreen wiper lever

A1

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Sun blind*

The rear side windows are fitted with sun blinds.

Sun blinds (rear side windows)

Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks at the top of the door

frame fig. 100.

Windscreen wiper

Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper le

and the automatic wash

The windscreen wiper leve

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to

wipe.

Intermittent wipe / Rai

Move the lever up to po

Move the switch up

Fig. 100 Sun blind extended to cover rear side window

AA

Lights and visibility 129

Safety Fir Technical Data

ction in the intermittent wipe position. The inter-

led automatically when it starts to rain.

d of 6 km/h ,you will have to enable the rain

it off and back on again.

sitivity of the rain sensor*.

nsitivity level for the rain sensor the windscreen

y moisture on the windscreen.

rmittent wipe setting are also varied automati-

eed (in addition to the sensitivity setting).

safe driving, the wiper must be in perfect re to do so could result in an accident.

intended to assist the driver. The driver is still the windscreen wipers as required depending

nt coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility , low sun or when driving at night, these coat- zzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such wiper blades to judder.

k that the wiper blade has not frozen before

ers. Should the windscreen wiper system be

zen, this could damage it or even the wind-

the windscreen wiper system (lever in position

tic car wash. This will avoid inadvertent trig-

sible damage to the wiper system.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

On vehicles equipped with a rain sensor*, you can move the

switch up and down to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Automatic wash and wipe

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, , to activate the

windscreen washer.

Release the lever. The washer will stop and the wipers will keep

running for approximately 4 seconds.

Disabling the windscreen wiper

Pull the lever to basic position .

General notes

The washers and wipers will work only when the ignition is switched on.

If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, the wiper speed will automatically be

reduced. The rain sensor* will automatically be set to the intermittent wipe

function.

The windscreen washer jets are heated when the ignition is switched on.

The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati-

cally according to the road speed (in addition to the manual delay setting).

When the lights are switched on you should only pull the lever briefly to wash

the windscreen, otherwise the headlight washers* will also be enabled. This

will use an unnecessary amount of fluid from the reservoir.

Rain sensor

The rain sensor* will only fun

mittent wipe function is enab

Before you reach a road spee

sensor manually by switching

Use control to set the sen

If you have selected a high se

wipers will react sooner to an

The wiper intervals in the inte

cally according to the road sp

WARNING

For correct visibility and condition page 215. Failu

The rain sensor* is only obliged to manually operate on visibility.

Do not use water-repelle conditions such as light rain ings can cause increased da coatings can also cause the

Caution In the event of frost, chec

enabling the windscreen wip

enabled when the blade is fro

screen wiper system motor.

Make sure you switch off

0) before you use an automa

gering of the wipers and pos

AA

A3

A4

A5

A0

AA

Lights and visibility130

iper lever forwards until it clicks into the

. The rear window wiper will wipe the

every 4 seconds.

to position . The rear window wiper

u hold the lever in this position.

ear window wiper will keep working for

s.

ipe function

s until it returns to its original position.

rt working automatically if reverse gear is

wipers are switched on.

driving, the wiper must be in perfect condition could result in an accident.

k that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

een wipers/rear window wiper. The windscreen

dscreen wiper motor could be damaged if you

ar window wiper with the blades frozen to the

A1

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Note Check that the washer fluid reservoir is full before starting a long journey.

Fill the reservoir page 234.

Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause smearing on the glass which can

also impair the effectiveness of the rain sensor*. Check the condition of wind-

screen wiper blades at regular intervals.

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever also operates the rear window

wiper and the automatic wash/wipe.

The rear window wiper and the automatic wash/wipe system are

switched on as follows:

Intermittent wipe

Push the windscreen w

first position fig. 102

window approximately

Automatic wash/wipe

Push the lever forwards

will work for the time yo

Release the lever. The r

approximately 4 second

Deactivating the interval w

Pull the lever backward

The rear window wiper will sta

engaged while the windscreen

WARNING

For correct visibility and safe page 215. Failure to do so

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

glass before using the windscr

wiper blades and even the win

start the windscreen wipers/re

glass.

Fig. 102 Windscreen wiper lever

Lights and visibility 131

Safety Fir Technical Data

r with manual anti-dazzle setting

ottom of the mirror forwards.

e rear view mirror

ottom of the mirror to the rear.

r-view mirror with automatic

le function can be switched on and off

Fig. 104 Interior rear view mirror with anti- dazzle setting: Indicator lamp and on/off switch

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Headlight washer system

With the lights switched on, operate the automatic wash and wipe

page 128, fig. 101 , and keep the lever pulled towards you for

at least 1 second.

The headlight washer jets come out of the bumper automatically (under water

pressure) fig. 103.

Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the lenses at regular intervals, for

instance when filling the tank.

To ensure that the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders

free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.

Rear-view mirrors

Interior rear view mirro

Normal setting

Point the lever at the b

Anti-dazzle setting for th

Point the lever at the b

Anti-dazzle interior rea adjustment*

The automatic anti-dazz

as desired.

Fig. 103 Headlight with extended washer jet

A5

Lights and visibility132

broken mirror can cause damage to plastic

ilar to remove the fluid as soon as possible.

matic anti-dazzle function* will only work prop-

ar window is retracted and if there are no other

reaching the interior mirror.

e of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

could prevent the automatic headlight or anti-

correctly or even from working at all.

adjusted electrically.

Fig. 105 Detailed view of the armrest: Adjuster knob

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Switching off anti-dazzle function

Press button page 131, fig. 104. Warning lamp goes

out:

Switching on anti-dazzle function

Press button page 131, fig. 104. The indicator lamp

will light up.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear view mirror will

darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-

dazzle function is disabled if:

the interior lighting is switched on

reverse gear is engaged

Sensors for automatic headlights*

When the light switch is set to the AUTO position, the dipped beam head-

lights are switched on and off automatically according to the ambient light

level with the aid of the sensors located in the interior rear view mirror

page 117.

WARNING

Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken mirror. This fluid can cause irrita- tion to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. Wash thoroughly with clean water should you come into contact with this fluid. Seek medical assist- ance if needed!

Caution Electrolyte fluid leaking from a

surfaces. Use a sponge or sim

Note The rear-view mirror's auto

erly if the sun blind* for the re

objects preventing light from

If you have to stick any typ

front of the sensors. Doing so

dazzle function from working

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors are

AA AB

AA AB

Lights and visibility 133

Safety Fir Technical Data

eric* mirrors increase the field of vision,

ller and further away in the mirrors. Therefore,

mirrors for judging the distance of vehicles

gs is knocked out of position (e.g. when

st be fully retracted with the electric control. Do

ng by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror

ver fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted

e edge of the mirror glass.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Turn the adjuster knob to position page 132, fig. 105 (left

exterior mirror) or position (right exterior mirror).

Move the knob as required to adjust the exterior mirror for a good

view behind you.

Retracting both exterior mirrors

Turn the knob to position .

It is advisable to fold the exterior mirrors, for example when parking or when

driving through narrow spaces.

Heated mirrors

The mirrors are heated (depending on the outside temperature) when the rear

window heater page 127 is switched on.

Memory for exterior mirrors*

On vehicles with memory function for the driver's seat, the setting of the exte-

rior mirrors is automatically stored together with the seat position

page 138.

Tilting function for exterior mirror on the passenger's side* (only if equipped with memory for exterior mirrors)

When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror surface tilts slightly downwards,

provided the mirror control is switched to the exterior mirror on the

passenger's side (knob in position page 132, fig. 105). This provides a

better view of the kerb when parking.

The mirror returns to its original position as soon as reverse gear is disen-

gaged and the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed above 15 km/h, or when

the mirror control is turned to position or to the neutral position .

Caution Rear view convex or asph

although objects appear sma

you should not rely on these

behind.

If one of the mirror housin

parking), the mirrors must fir

not readjust the mirror housi

adjuster function.

Note If the electrical adjustment e

by hand by lightly pressing th

AL

AR

AA

AR

AL A0

Seats and stowage134

rds and backwards

106 and move the seat to the desired

and move the seat further until the

e moved forwards and backwards when the ure to do so could result in an accident.

ht*

106 up repeatedly until the seat is in the

n repeatedly until the seat is in the

seat must not be adjusted while driving. n an accident.

1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Seats and stowage

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Seat adjuster controls

There are several seat adjustment functions for your conven-

ience

Some of the equipment listed is only fitted on certain models or is an optional

extra.

Control switches

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Raising/lowering the seat

Adjusting the backrest angle

Adjusting lumbar support

Moving the seats forwa

Lift the lever fig.

position.

Then release the lever

catch engages.

WARNING

The driver's seat must only b vehicle is at a standstill. Fail

Adjusting the seat heig

Raising the seat

Pull the lever fig.

desired position.

Lowering the seat

Press the lever dow

desired position.

WARNING

The height of the driver's Failure to do so could result i

Fig. 106 Adjuster controls on driver's seat

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A

A2

A2

Seats and stowage 135

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Lean forwards to take your weight off the backrest.

Turn the adjuster wheel page 134, fig. 106 to set the angle

of the backrest as required.

WARNING

The front backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, safety belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subsequent danger of injury.

Adjusting lumbar support*

Do not exert any pressure on the backrest and turn adjuster

wheel page 134, fig. 106 to adjust lumbar support.

As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the

lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the

natural curvature of the spine.

WARNING (continued)

A3

A4

Seats and stowage136

or the seat and backrest correspond with

seats can be adjusted merely by pressing

n the required direction.

/ backwards

07 forwards or backwards fig. 108

own .

part of the seat

up or down .

part of the seat

up or down .

Fig. 108 Front seat: Seat adjustment switches

A1

AA A2

AA A3

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Electric adjustment of front seats*

Adjusting the seat

The arrangement of the switches corresponds with the design

of the seats.

The adjustment switches f

the design of the seat. The

the corresponding switch i

Moving the seat forwards

Press switch fig. 1

.

Raising/lowering the seat

Press switch up or d

Raising/lowering the front

Press the front of switch

Raising/lowering the rear

Press the rear of switch

Fig. 107 Front seat: Adjuster controls AA

AA

Seats and stowage 137

Safety Fir Technical Data

appropriate direction of the arrow

e backrest .

t be reclined for driving. Otherwise, safety might not protect as they should, with the .

be adjusted to fit the natural curve of

Fig. 110 Front seat: Adjuster switch for lumbar support

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Control switches

Seat adjustment

Backrest adjustment

Lumbar support*

WARNING

The electrical seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off or when the key is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Press the button in the

fig. 109 to adjust th

WARNING

The front backrests must no belts and the airbag system subsequent danger of injury

Lumbar support*

The lumbar support can

the spine.

AA

AB

AC

Fig. 109 Front seat: Back- rest adjuster switch

Seats and stowage138

's seat*

driver's door can be used to store

erent positions for the driver's seat

and 4 fig. 111, you can store and recall the

ons for up to four different drivers.

led if the button is in the up position

will light up next to the button (only

itched on).

ain in the memory. However, the seat and the

be adjusted using the conventional electrical

Fig. 111 Driver's door: Memory system

STOP

STOP

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Adjusting the contour of lumbar support

Press the front part of the adjuster switch page 137, fig. 110

to increase the contour of the lumbar support.

Press the rear part of the adjuster switch to decrease the contour

of the lumbar support.

Adjusting the height of lumbar support

Press the top part of the adjuster switch to move the lumbar

support upwards.

Press the bottom part of the adjuster switch to move the lumbar

support down.

The lumbar support provides effective support for the natural curvature of the

spine to give a more relaxed seating position, especially on long journeys.

Memory for driver

Description

The recall buttons in the

and recall up to four diff

and exterior mirrors.

Memory buttons

Using the recall buttons 1, 2, 3

seat and exterior mirror positi

button

The seat memory will be disab

(press and release). The word

visible when the lights are sw

The stored settings will all rem

exterior mirrors can now only

STOP

Seats and stowage 139

Safety Fir Technical Data

e the settings stored in memory buttons 1 to 4.

d at any time.

recalled using either the memory

ontrol (remote control key).

s

pen, press the desired memory button

losed, press and hold down the appro-

until the seat and exterior mirrors reach

itions.

g the remote control and open the driver's

n minutes.

to be called up using the memory buttons if the

ithin 10 minutes after unlocking the vehicle with

eat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is so could result in an accident.

mory function can be stopped at any time by by briefly pressing any of the memory

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

adjustment. Use of the button is recommended to disable the memory

system when the vehicle is being driven temporarily by a different driver

whose settings do not need to be stored in the memory.

Note You can also use the remote control to call up the stored settings

page 140.

Storing settings

The button must be in its down position (pressed in) before

you can store the desired settings.

Adjust the driver's seat as required page 136.

Adjust both exterior mirrors page 132.

Press and hold the button. At the same time, press one of

the memory buttons for at least a second.

Release both buttons. The setting is now stored on the selected

memory button.

Any new setting selected automatically cancels the existing setting stored on

the memory button. It is best to begin with memory button No. 1 for the first

driver and then assign the other memory buttons to each subsequent driver.

The seat and mirror positions are stored when the car is locked with the

remote control and are assigned to the remote control key. The exterior

mirrors adjust automatically to the previous position when you unlock the

car; the driver's seat adjusts automatically when you open the driver's door.

However, this does not delet

These settings can be enable

Enabling settings

Stored settings can be

buttons or the remote c

Using the memory button

If the driver's door is o

briefly.

If the driver's door is c

priate memory button

their programmed pos

Using the remote control

Unlock the vehicle usin

door within the next te

The seat adjustment will have

driver's door is not opened w

the remote control.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the s at a standstill. Failure to do

In an emergency, the me pressing the STOP button or buttons.

STOP

STOP

MEMO

Seats and stowage140

perly worn seat belts, the head

protection, provided they are prop-

height of the occupant.

f the head restraint with both hands.

nt.

t

wer the head restraint.

Fig. 112 Front seats: Head restraints

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Assigning remote control keys

The key must be assigned to a memory button so that the

positions stored in the memory can also be recalled using the

remote control key.

Assigning the remote control key to a memory button

Using the memory button, recall the settings that are to be

programmed onto the key.

Keeping the memory button pressed down, press the unlock

button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the memory button.

Deleting assignment of the remote control key to the memory button

Press and hold the button and press the unlock button on

the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the button.

The previous settings are automatically cancelled when the keys are re-

assigned to different memory buttons.

Head restraints

Front head restraints

In combination with pro

restraints offer effective

erly adjusted to suit the

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides o

Pull up the head restrai

Lowering the head restrain

Press button and lo

MEMO

MEMO

AA

Seats and stowage 141

Safety Fir Technical Data

t

of the head restraint with both hands.

int as far as it will go.

int

. 113 and lower the head restraint.

int

int as far as it will go.

. 113 and pull out the head restraint.

nt in its guides until it clicks into place.

wer the head restraint.

ccupied, the head restraints should be moved

they do not obstruct the driver's field of

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Removing the head restraints

Pull up the head restraint as far as it will go.

Press button and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.

Press button and lower the head restraint.

The height of the head restraints is adjustable. They should be set to suit the

height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head

restraints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.

For best protection, the top of the head restraint should be at least at eye level

or higher.

Head restraints on the side rear seats

Raising the head restrain

Take hold of the sides

Pull up the head restra

Lowering the head restra

Press button fig

Removing the head restra

Pull up the head restra

Press button fig

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrai

Press button and lo

When the rear seats are not o

to the lowest position so that

vision.

AA

AA

Fig. 113 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Seats and stowage142

cupied the head restraints should be moved to

y do not obstruct the driver's field of vision.

sted to several positions and incorpo-

ment.

f the armrest, fold the armrest all the way

dually until it engages in the desired

artment

fig. 115.

Fig. 115 Armrest between the driver's seat and front passenger's seat

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Central head restraint of the rear seat

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull up the head restraint as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button fig. 114 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull up the head restraint as far as it will go.

Press button fig. 114 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.

Press button and lower the head restraint.

When the rear seats are not oc

the lowest position so that the

Armrests

The armrest can be adju

rates a storage compart

Adjusting the armrest

To adjust the position o

down.

Then lift the armrest gra

position.

Opening the storage comp

Press the release lever

Fig. 114 Centre rear seat: Head restraints

AA

AA

AA

Seats and stowage 143

Safety Fir Technical Data

luggage net* or with non-elastic straps

g rings page 144.

luggage compartment can suddenly shift and ng of the vehicle.

n manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger rward and might injure vehicle occupants.

in the luggage compartment and use appro- particularly in the case of heavy objects.

vy objects, always bear in mind that a change lso cause changes in vehicle handling.

on page 7.

s chafe against the wires of the heating element

ge them.

justed according to the load. If necessary,

l on the door pillar page 242.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Please note that the armrest can restrict the driver's movements when it is

lowered. The armrest should therefore be raised when driving in city traffic.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Loads in the luggage compartment should be safely secured.

To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe the following

points:

Distribute the load evenly.

Position heavy items as far forward as possible fig. 116.

Secure the load with a

secured to the fastenin

WARNING

Unsecured objects in the cause changes in the handli

In an accident or a sudde compartment can be flung fo

Always keep all objects priate grips to secure them,

When you transport hea of the centre of gravity can a

Please refer to the notes

Caution Make sure that no hard object

in the rear window and dama

Note The tyre pressure must be ad

consult the tyre pressure labe

Fig. 116 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.

Seats and stowage144

used to secure and retain light items

ment.

to the four fastening rings -arrows-

ed to the fastening rings in the bottom of the

be used to hold objects weighing up to 5 kg. fely secured (injury risk).

Fig. 118 Stretch net laid out

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Fastening rings

There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment,

which can be used to secure loads.

Use the fastening rings to secure the load fig. 117 -arrows-.

Please refer to the safety notes page 17.

Luggage net*

The luggage net can be

in the luggage compart

Luggage net

Secure the luggage net

fig. 118.

The luggage net can be attach

luggage compartment panel.

WARNING

The luggage net should only Heavier objects cannot be sa

Fig. 117 Location of fastening rings in luggage compartment

Seats and stowage 145

Safety Fir Technical Data

cover*

w into the luggage compartment.

ompartment cover

. 120, pull the rolled-up cover evenly

vehicle.

ar into the grooves in the left and right-

20 -arrows-.

mpartment cover

rooves in the side trim.

wly.

luggage compartment cover page 147.

Fig. 120 Tailgate open with luggage compart- ment cover closed

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Retaining strap*

The retaining strap can be used to secure items of luggage to

the right-hand side lining in the luggage compartment.

Hook the retaining strap into housing or fig. 119.

You can attach the strap to the top or bottom housing, depending on the size

of the object you wish to secure.

To secure shorter objects, the retaining strap can also be attached to the

centre. However, this is only possible if the strap is attached to housing .

WARNING

The retaining strap should only be used to hold objects weighing up to 5 kg. Heavier objects cannot be safely secured (injury risk).

Luggage compartment

The cover blocks the vie

Pulling out the luggage c

Using handle fig

towards the rear of the

Insert the ends of the b

hand side trim fig. 1

Retracting the luggage co

Lift the bar out of the g

Let the cover roll up slo

Removing and installing the

Fig. 119 Retaining strap attached to right-hand side lining

AA AB

AB

AA

Seats and stowage146

ith the rear backrest folded down

rests page 149.

bar in the retainers fig. 121.

ille

e retainers.

wly.

artition grille page 147.

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

WARNING

The luggage compartment cover should not be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on this cover could cause injury to vehicle occupants in an accident or if the brakes are applied suddenly.

Partition grille*

The partition grille prevents loose objects in the luggage

compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger

compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).

Pulling out and securing the partition grille

Pull the grille up as far as it will go.

Engage the ends of the bar in the retainers fig. 121.

Using the partition grille w

Fold down the rear back

Pull the grille upwards.

Engage the ends of the

Retracting the partition gr

Unhook the bar from th

Let the grille retract slo

Removing and installing the p

Fig. 121 Retainers for the partition grille

AB

Seats and stowage 147

Safety Fir Technical Data

rtment cover / partition grille

ar door.

ts page 149.

in the direction indicated fig. 122 and

g rails.

rtment cover / partition grille

ar door.

ts page 149.

on the backrest so that the retainers

retaining rails fig. 123.

partment cover / partition grille towards

e vehicle as far as it will go.

A AB

AC

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Removing and installing luggage compartment cover / partition grille

The luggage compartment cover / partition grille can only be

removed when the rear backrests are folded forwards.

Removing luggage compa

Open the right-hand re

Fold down the backres

Pull the partition grille

lift it out of the retainin

Installing luggage compa

Open the right-hand re

Fold down the backres

Fit the partition grille

are located next to the

Push the luggage com

the left-hand side of thFig. 122 Removing luggage compartment cover / partition grille

Fig. 123 Installing luggage compartment cover / partition grille

A

Seats and stowage148

upright position

fig. 124, lift the floor panel and line

of the floor panel with the recesses .

ansporting onto the luggage compart-

inst rear backrest

fig. 124 and fold out the floor

backrest.

fig. 124 and fold out the floor

backrest.

panel towards the rear of the vehicle so it

ers fig. 125.

d under floor panel fig. 124.

g items in the luggage compartment liner can

e floor panel or removing it completely.

out to the upright position you should not

than about 7.5 kg, or items which exceed 2/3

or panel.

AB

AC

AA

AA

AD

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Luggage compartment liner*

You can use the liner to protect the inside of the luggage

compartment when carrying wet or dirty items.

Folding out floor panel to

Open the tailgate.

Take hold of handle

up the bottom corners

Put the items you are tr

ment liner

Folding floor panel up aga

Open the tailgate.

Take hold of the handle

panel as far as the rear

Removing floor panel

Open the tailgate.

Take hold of the handle

panel as far as the rear

Pull the complete floor

comes out of the retain

Small items can also be store

The space available for carryin

be increased by folding out th

Caution When the floor panel is folded

transport items weighing more

of the height of the upright flo

Fig. 124 Floor panel raised

Fig. 125 Floor panel removed for increased luggage space

AA

Seats and stowage 149

Safety Fir Technical Data

n system*

vigation system is located in this storage

compartment. Separate operating instructions

compartment

backrest can be folded forwards either

o increase the capacity of the luggage

ards

fig. 127 in the direction indicated

t.

Fig. 127 Backrest release lever

AA

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Note It is advisable to secure the items by means of a strap secured to the

fastening rings on the left and the right hand side.

Side storage compartment

The CD-ROM player for the navigation system* is located in

the left side storage compartment of the luggage compart-

ment.

To open the storage compartment, pull the handle forwards

fig. 126.

CD-ROM player for navigatio

The CD-ROM player for the na

compartment in the luggage

are enclosed for this system.

Extending the luggage

The two sections of the

together or separately t

compartment.

Folding the backrest forw

Press the release lever

by the arrow.

Fold down the backres

Fig. 126 Luggage compartment: Side trim with closed storage compartment

Seats and stowage150

" to transport skis or other extra-long

vehicle without soiling or damaging

Fig. 128 Detailed view of the rear of the rear back- rest: Ski bag cover

Fig. 129 Fastening the ski bag in the seatbelt buckle

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Returning the backrest to its upright position

Push the backrest up until it engages securely . The red

marking on the tab should no longer be visible when the

backrest is properly secured.

WARNING

Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that the seat belt can provide proper protection on the centre rear seat.

The rear backrest must always be securely latched so that objects stored in the luggage compartment will not fly forward during sudden braking.

Caution When returning the backrest to an upright position, make sure that the seat

belts for the outer rear seats are in their guides, so that they cannot be caught

up and damaged in the catches for the backrest.

Ski bag*

You can use the "ski bag

objects safely inside the

the upholstery.

AB

Seats and stowage 151

Safety Fir Technical Data

in place with the fastening belt after it has

after use if it is still damp.

f rails*

be carried on the roof carrier.

ou intend to carry loads on the roof:

cross bars from the of SEAT Genuine Accesso-

basic elements of a complete roof carrier

wever, the corresponding additional fastenings

e, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats. All the

re available from Authorised Service Centres.

used by the use of other types of roof rack or

be covered by the factory warranty. The roof

be installed exactly according to the instruc-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Loading

Open the tailgate.

Press the release catch for the ski bag cover page 150,

fig. 128 -arrow- and swivel the cover downwards.

Pull down the centre rear armrest.

From the passenger compartment, press down the release catch

for the ski bag cover and pull out the cover.

Pull out and unfold the ski bag.

The long items can now be loaded through the luggage compart-

ment into the ski bag .

Securing

Insert the fastening belt page 150, fig. 129 of the ski bag

into the centre seat belt buckle .

Pull the free end of belt to tighten.

Storing

Close the cover of the load-through hatch in the luggage

compartment.

Carefully fold away the ski bag.

Close the inside cover of the load-through hatch from the

passenger compartment.

WARNING

The ski bag must be secured been loaded.

Note Do not fold away the ski bag

Roof carrier / roo

Description

Additional luggage can

Note the following points if y

We recommend using the

ries range.

These cross bars form the

system. For safety reasons, ho

must be fitted to carry luggag

components of this system a

Caution Any damage to the vehicle ca

incorrect installation will not

carrier system must therefore

tions provided.

AA

AB

AC

Seats and stowage152

sed, the roof carrier must not be loaded to the

f less resistant systems are used, these must

m weight permitted indicated in the assembly

must be securely attached. Failure to do so

um roof load for the vehicle, the maximum ross vehicle weight. Failure to do so could

or bulky loads on the roof, bear in mind that by the extra weight on the roof and a possible . Adjust your speed and driving style accord-

t the tailgate strike the roof load when open.

vironment ched for convenience, even when they are not

eased air resistance means that the vehicle

n you should always take off the roof carrier

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Attachment points

The roof carrier must be attached at the marked points only.

The cross-bars must be fitted exactly between the points marked on the roof

railings fig. 130. The markings are visible on the inside of the railings.

Caution A roof carrier unit must not be used if the vehicle is not equipped with roof

rails (basic support).

Roof load

Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. The car's

handling is affected whenever you carry loads on the vehicle.

The authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg. Use the weight of the

roof carrier system and that of the load as a basis to calculate the roof load.

If less resistant systems are u

maximum weight permitted. I

only be loaded to the maximu

instructions.

WARNING

Loads carried on the roof could result in an accident.

Do not exceed the maxim axle loads or the maximum g result in an accident.

When transporting heavy the car's handling is affected susceptibility to cross winds ingly to avoid accidents.

Caution Please take extra care not to le

For the sake of the en Roof carriers are often left atta

being used. However, the incr

uses more fuel. For this reaso

when it is not in use.

Fig. 130 Attachment points for cross bars

Seats and stowage 153

Safety Fir Technical Data

ar armrest*

fig. 132.

tainer arms , release it by pressing in

(arrow) and move it as required.

ositioned against the drinks holder so that it is

n be held in the centre armrest.

s in the drink holder while the vehicle is if the hot liquid is spilt.

Fig. 132 Drink holder in the rear armrest

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Drink holders

Front drink holders

To open the drink holder, press the symbol on the drink holder

lid fig. 131

To close the drink holder, press it in until it engages.

WARNING

Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.

Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.

Drinks holder in the re

Opening the drink holder

Press the symbol

Adjusting the retainer arm

To adjust one of the re

the direction indicated

The retainer arm should be p

held securely.

One or two drinks holders ca

WARNING

Do not put any hot drink moving. You can be scalded

Fig. 131 Detailed view of instrument panel: Drink holders

AA

Seats and stowage154

ress it into its mountings.

ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

ig. 134 and lift out the ashtray.

Fig. 134 Rear ashtray

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.

Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and power points

Front ashtray*

Opening the ashtray

Lightly press the front part of the ashtray fig. 133.

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the sides of the ashtray fig. 133 and lift it out.

Fitting the ashtray casing

Insert the casing and p

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the

Rear ashtray

Opening the ashtray

Lift the lid.

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the lid f

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 133 Centre console: Open ashtray

AA

AB

Seats and stowage 155

Safety Fir Technical Data

ighter immediately.

r element of the cigarette lighter to light

r back in its socket.

lighter.

lectrical appliance into the cigarette

5 employs a standard 12-volt socket, which can

ce for electrical appliances. The appliances

t not exceed a power rating of 100 W.

e electric cigarette lighter. Carelessness or cigarette lighter can cause burns.

k when the ignition is switched on.

d, therefore, any appliances connected to e ignition is switched on.

f plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

es with the engine switched off will cause a

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Fitting the ashtray casing

Open the lid on the ashtray and press the casing into the

mounting as far as it will go.

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

Cigarette lighter*

The 12-volt socket for the cigarette lighter can also be used as

a power source for other electrical appliances.

Using the cigarette lighter

Press in the cigarette lighter knob.

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

Pull out the cigarette l

Use the glowing heate

your cigarette.

Put the cigarette lighte

Operating the socket

Take out the cigarette

Insert the plug of the e

lighter socket.

The cigarette lighter fig. 13

also be used as a power sour

connected to the socket mus

WARNING

Be careful when using th negligence when using the

The lighter will only wor

The electrical sockets an them will only work when th

Caution Always use the correct type o

Note The use of electrical applianc

battery discharge.

Fig. 135 Cigarette lighter in the centre console

Seats and stowage156

s with the engine switched off will cause a

e compartments at various points in

storage compartments:

ted are only provided in certain models / model

mpartment page 157

entre console

ms page 158

page 158

luggage com-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Power point in the luggage compartment*

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 Volt socket.

Lift the power point cover fig. 136.

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12-volt socket. The appliances

connected to the socket must not exceed a power rating of 100 W.

WARNING

The power points, and any accessories connected to them are also func- tional with the ignition switched off or the key removed. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Caution Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Note The use of electrical appliance

battery discharge.

Compartments

Overview

There are several storag

the vehicle.

Your vehicle has the following

Some of the compartments lis

years or are optional extras.

Fig. 136 Detailed view of the side trim in the luggage compartment: 12-volt socket

First-aid kit*

Emergency triangle*

Glove compartment (glove co

cooling)

Storage compartment in the c

Vehicle wallet compartment*

Compartments in the door tri

Coat hooks

Side storage compartment in

partment

Seats and stowage 157

Safety Fir Technical Data

e compartment must always be closed when e to do so could result in an accident.

artment*

ork when the climate control is deliv-

rtment fig. 137.

l box fig. 138.

ch cooling on and off.

Fig. 138 Glove compart- ment with cool box open

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Glove compartment

The glove compartment is equipped with a lock* and a light.

Opening the glove compartment

Pull the handle on the lid in the direction indicated (arrow)

fig. 137 and open the lid.

Closing the glove compartment

Close the lid and push it in until it engages.

If the side lights or headlights are switched on, the light in the glove compart-

ment comes on when it is opened.

The lid has separate holders for a pen and a note pad.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the glov the vehicle is moving. Failur

Cool box in glove comp

The cool box will only w

ering cooled air.

Open the glove compa

Open the lid of the coo

Turn switch to swit

Fig. 137 Glove compart- ment

AA

Seats and stowage158

ve each of the rear doors.

y items of clothing hanging from the coat iew to the rear.

ly be used for lightweight clothing. Do not ects in the pockets.

rs to hang up the clothing, as this could inter- ead-protection airbags*.

Fig. 140 Area above the rear doors: Coat hooks

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The cool box will only work when the climate control is delivering cooled air.

We recommend you switch off the cool box if the climate control is delivering

warm air to heat the interior.

Note The non-slip mat in the cool box can be removed for cleaning.

Compartments in the door trim

Storage compartments are provided in the door trims.

WARNING

The storage compartments in the door trims should only be used to store small objects. Make sure that they are stored safely inside the compart- ment, as they might otherwise impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

Coat hooks

There is a coat hook abo

WARNING

Please make sure that an hooks do not obstruct your v

The coat hooks should on leave any heavy or sharp obj

Do not use clothes hange fere with the function of the h

Fig. 139 Door trim with storage compartment

Seats and stowage 159

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Compartments in the front seats

There is a storage compartment with a lid at the front of each

front seat.

Opening

Pull the handle to open the compartment.

Closing

Close the lid and push it in until it engages.

Note The compartments will hold a maximum weight of 1 kg.

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160

re outside the vehicle are high, condensation

the air cooling system and form a pool under-

al and does not indicate a leak.

ow, the blower normally only switches to a

t has warmed up sufficiently (this does not

ngine power, the air conditioning compressor

n pulling away from standstill with full throttle.

off if the coolant temperature is excessively

ne cooling under extreme loads.

d particle filter and activated charcoal filter)

purities in the outside air, including dust and

with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter

he intervals specified in the Service Schedule.

with a high level of air pollution and the filter

ay be necessary to change the filter element

ate control system is damaged, switch over to

damage and have the system checked by a

trol require specialist knowledge and special

ontact a specialist garage if the system is not

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning

2C-Climatronic

Description

The climate control is designed to automatically keep the

passenger compartment at the temperature you find most

comfortable at all times of the year.

Recommended settings:

Set the temperature to 22C (71F).

Press the page 162, fig. 141 button.

The following setting quickly provides a comfortable temperature inside the

vehicle. We therefore recommend you do not modify the setting unless you

find this temperature uncomfortable or where circumstances require as such.

The climate control provides heating and ventilation and also cools and

dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle.

The climate control is fully automatic and will constantly maintain the temper-

ature which has been set. To achieve this, the temperature of the air supplied

to the interior, the blower speed (volume of air delivery) and the air distribu-

tion are regulated automatically. The system also takes solar radiation into

account and, therefore, no subsequent manual readjustments are required.

Therefore, automatic mode page 163 should be used for the comfort of all

the passengers in virtually all conditions throughout the year.

Please note the following points:

The humidity of the air is automatically reduced when the system cools the

interior of the vehicle. This helps to prevent condensation on the windows.

If the humidity and temperatu

can drip off the evaporator in

neath the vehicle. This is norm

If the outside temperature is l

higher speed once the coolan

apply to the defrost setting).

In order to achieve maximum e

is temporarily switched off whe

The compressor also switches

high to ensure adequate engi

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combine

serves as a barrier against im

pollen.

For the climate control to work

element must be replaced at t

If the vehicle is driven in areas

is no longer fully effective, it m

more frequently.

Caution If you suspect that the clim

ECON mode to prevent further

specialist garage.

Repairs to the climate con

tools. For this reason, please c

working properly.

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 161

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice and

leaves to ensure unimpaired heating and cooling and to prevent the windows

misting over.

The air from the outlets flows through the passenger compartment and

out through the slots below the rear window. Therefore, do not cover these

slots with items of clothing or other objects.

The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows

and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up

after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more

quickly by opening the windows briefly.

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning162

l.

. 141 Climate control controls

tic mode

ture selection for the left

t sides

air recirculation mode

s off air cooling

s off climate control (instead of )

tic air recirculation mode (instead of )

OFF

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Controls

This overview will help you become quickly familiar with the controls for the climate contro

The left-hand display shows the temperature selected for the left-hand side

and the right-hand display the temperature for the right-hand side.

The functions can be switched on or off by briefly pressing the buttons. The

diode on the buttons lights up when the function is enabled.

The grille between buttons and must be kept clear, as the tempera-

ture sensors are located behind the grille.

Do not cover the grille.

Do not clean the grille with a vacuum cleaner, as this could damage the

temperature sensors located behind the grille.

Fig

Button(s) Meaning

Automa

(left and right

sides)

Tempera

and righ

Defrost

Manual

Switche

Switche

Automa

AUTO

- +

ECON

OFF

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 163

Safety Fir Technical Data

ted automatically. The temperature is not regu-

on the driver's side pressed for several seconds,

nger's side can be set to the temperature of the

display indicates the new temperature value.

ure

can be selected for the driver's and

ns below the displays page 162,

ed temperature is selected for the driver's

r's side.

rature setting is shown in the display above the

on the driver's side pressed for several seconds,

nger's side can be set to the temperature of the

e display indicates the new temperature value.

ting can be restored by resetting the display on

de as required.

- +

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The , and buttons (which regulate air distribution) can either be

selected individually or in combination.

Automatic mode

Standard setting for all seasons.

Switching on automatic mode

Select a temperature between +18C (64F) and +29C (86F).

Press the button page 162, fig. 141.

The automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle and

dehumidifies the air. Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution are

regulated automatically to reach the desired interior temperature as quickly

as possible, and then to maintain this temperature. The system automatically

compensates for any variations in the outside temperature and for the effect

of direct sunlight.

The automatic temperature regulation only operates at temperature settings

between +18C and +29C. If a temperature below +18C is selected, LO

appears on the display. If a temperature is selected which is higher than

+29C, the display will show HI. In the two extreme settings, the climate

control operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating output and

the temperature is not regula

lated.

Note By keeping the button

the temperature of the passe

driver's side or vice versa. The

Selecting the temperat

Separate temperatures

front passenger's side.

Press the or butto

fig. 141 until the desir

side or front passenge

The currently selected tempe

buttons.

By keeping the button

the temperature of the passe

driver's side or vice versa. Th

The previous temperature set

the driver's or passenger's si

(centre buttons)

Adjusts blower speed

Air to the windows

Air from the dashboard outlets

Air to the footwells

Button(s) Meaning

- +

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

- +

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning164

nnel or in queues of traffic, to prevent fumes

icle.

the air recirculation mode enabled because, cted, the windscreen may mist up because no ior of the vehicle, with the subsequent risk of

fuel.

button page 162, fig. 141.

button again or select the

ECON mode. The heating and the blower are

stands for Economy. Disconnecting air

fuel.

mperature must not be lower than the outside

e blower does not cool or dehumidify the air in

d therefore mist up.

mentary heater is switched off in ECON mode

n continues to light up when the ECON mode

climate control has been switched on) this is

ECON

ON

CON AUTO

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Defrosting

The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted

as quickly as possible.

To enable this mode, press the page 162, fig. 141 button.

To disable, press the button again or select the button.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased to

maximum and most of the air comes out of outlets 1 and 2 page 167.

The air recirculation and ECON modes are switched off when the button is

pressed.

Air recirculation: manual enabling

The air recirculation setting prevents fumes etc. from entering

the interior.

Enabling air recirculation mode

Press the page 162, fig. 141 button.

Disabling air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the button or

Press the button.

In this setting, the air in the vehicle is constantly recirculated. We recommend

using the air recirculation mode in the following circumstances:

When driving through a tu

entering the interior of the veh

WARNING

Do not drive for too long with if the compressor is disconne fresh air is entering the inter accidents.

ECON Mode (economy)

ECON mode helps save

To enable, press the

To disable, press the

button.

Air cooling is disconnected in

adjusted automatically. ECON

cooling (compressor) saves on

Please note that the interior te

temperature in ECON mode. Th

the interior. The windows coul

On diesel vehicles, the supple

to save fuel.

Note If the diode on the ECON butto

has been switched off (i.e. the

AUTO

AUTO

EC

E

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 165

Safety Fir Technical Data

n mode should normally be left switched on at

te approx. 30 seconds after the engine ignition

this initial period, fresh air is fed into the car.

air conditioning system detects a certain

outside air, the control unit will either pass the

lution filter or automatically switch on the air

h concentration of pollution in the outside air,

ally switches to air recirculation and the supply

off. As soon as the level of pollution decreases,

the outside again.

n operates for a maximum period of 12 minutes.

the automatic air recirculation is on, press the

n switches itself off under certain circumstances

lected). In ECON and at temperature of below

utomatic air recirculation mode is limited to 12

ture display from C to F and vice

y can be switched from C (degrees

Fahrenheit) and vice versa.

button for recirculation mode and briefly

f the left-hand temperature selector

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

due to a defect in one of the climate control components. If a malfunction

should occur, please contact a specialist garage.

Air recirculation: automatic activation*

If the outside air is polluted by diesel and petrol emissions,

an air purity sensor in the vehicle will automatically switch on

the air recirculation.

Enabling air recirculation mode

Press the button fig. 142.

Disabling air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the button or

Press button .

The automatic air recirculatio

all times.

The system is ready to opera

key has been turned. During

If the air purity sensor in the

concentration of fumes in the

incoming air through the pol

recirculation. If there is a hig

the climate control automatic

of air from the outside is cut

air is fed into the vehicle from

The automatic air recirculatio

If the windows mist up when

button immediately.

The automatic air recirculatio

(for instance if or is se

approx. 8C below zero, the a

seconds.

Switching the tempera versa

The temperature displa

Celsius) to F (degrees

Press and hold the

press the plus button o

page 162, fig. 141.

Fig. 142 Button for auto- matic air recirculation

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning166

ed blower speed can be reduced or

tons in the centre of the control panel

set the blower to the desired speed (and

air delivery).

tomatically regulates the blower speed

erature. However, you can also adjust the air

blower setting is illustrated by a bar in the

tons).

ssenger temperature

e passenger temperature like the driver

button on the driver's side for 2 seconds

automatically the driver temperature like the

s the button on the passenger's side for AUTO

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Switching the climate control on/off

Switching the climate control off: models with an button

Press the button. The climate control is switched off and the

supply of air from outside the car is cut off.

Switching the climate control off: models with a button

Keep pressing the button for the blower until the display

segment is empty. The climate control is switched off and the

supply of air from outside the car is cut off.

Switching the climate control on: models with an button

Press the button again, or

Press the button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

Switching the climate control on: models with a button

Press the button for the blower, or

Press the button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

The climate control also starts to operate if one of the blower or temperature

selector buttons is pressed.

Blower speed

The automatically select

increased manually.

Press the and but

page 162, fig. 141 to

regulate the volume of

The climate control system au

according to the interior temp

delivery manually. The current

middle display (above the but

Automatic change of pa

In order to set automatically th

temperature, press the

approximately. In order to set

passenger's temperature, pres

2 seconds approximately.

OFF

OFF

-

OFF

OFF

AUTO

+

AUTO

- +

- +

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 167

Safety Fir Technical Data

limate control is mainly issued from outlets

cooling, outlets and should therefore

rammed air distribution can be

can be operated either separately or in combi-

cally controlled air distribution, switch off the

or press the button

g. 143 Instrument panel: Location of air outlets

A3

A3 A4

AUTO

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Air outlets

The air outlets fig. 143 and can be operated as follows:

Outlets and

The outlets can be opened and closed by turning the left thum-

bwheels.

The direction of air delivery from the outlets can be varied as

required using the adjuster in the centre of each outlet grille. The

direction of air flow can be adjusted horizontally and vertically as

desired.

The flow of air from the outlets is controlled either automatically or manually,

depending on the operating mode selected. All the outlets can provide air

that is either heated, unheated or cooled.

The heater outlets for the rear footwells are located under the front seats.

They are controlled together with outlets .

Note The cool air provided by the c

and . To ensure adequate

never be closed completely.

Air distribution

The automatically-prog

altered manually.

The buttons , and

nation. To return to automati

selected functions separately

Fi

A3 A4

A3 A4

A5

A4

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning168

d up after standing in the sun, open the

a short time to cool the vehicle.

vironment the amount of pollutants emitted from your

tched on, the climate control settings

selected automatically.

lected are automatically stored and assigned

hicle is started, the climate control automati-

ned to the key. Hence, every driver automati-

settings without having to select them manu-

key and enter other settings, the previous

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Each of the three buttons has a specific function. The numbers relate to the

air outlets page 167, fig. 143.

Air directed to windows

This setting directs all the air to outlets 1 and 2. Unlike in setting , the

volume of air delivery remains the same.

Air to the driver/front passenger

All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4 in the dash panel and from the rear of

the centre console.

Air to the footwells

Most of the air emerges from outlets 5 and the outlets under the front seats.

Some of the air will also be issued from outlets 3 and 4.

Note In all of the above air distribution settings, a small amount of air will still

come from the other outlets.

Economical use of the climate control

Economical use of the climate control will help save fuel.

Engine power is reduced and fuel consumption increases when the

climate control is in cooling mode. To ensure that the system is only

switched on when it is really necessary, please note the following

points:

Select ECON mode if you wish to save fuel.

Select ECON mode if you decide to open the windows or sun roof*

while driving.

If the vehicle has heate

windows and doors for

For the sake of the en By saving fuel you also reduce

vehicle.

Key settings

When the ignition is swi

assigned to the key are

The climate control settings se

to the key in use. When the ve

cally selects the settings assig

cally obtains his/her preferred

ally.

Note Should another driver use the

settings will be deleted.

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 169

Safety Fir Technical Data

st of the front seats can be electrically

fig. 144 to switch on and adjust the

t front seats.

en the thumbwheel is set to 0. The temperature

g elements of the seat heating, please do not

arp pressure to a single point.

Fig. 144 Detailed view of instrument panel: Thum- bwheel controls for seat heating

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Solar-powered blower/solar roof*

If the vehicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight, the

blower will operate in solar-powered mode when the ignition

is switched off.

After the ignition is switched off, the blower is supplied with electrical power

from the solar roof. Please ensure that outlets 3 and 4 are open page 167,

fig. 143 to ensure the best possible ventilation.

The blower only works when the sun roof is closed or tilted open at the rear.

If the air recirculation mode is on when you switch off the engine, the climate

control will automatically switch to fresh air ventilation.

Supplementary heating*

Diesel vehicles are fitted with supplementary heating2) to raise the tempera-

ture of the interior as quickly as possible. At outdoor temperatures below

+5C and with the engine running, the supplementary heating will switch on

and off automatically depending on the temperature of the coolant.

In order to save fuel, the supplementary heating can be can be switched off

by briefly pressing the button on the climate control.

Seat heating*

The surface and backre

heated.

Turn thumbwheel or

heating on the left or righ

The heating is switched off wh

settings range from 1 to 6.

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

kneel on the seat or apply sh

2) For Nordic countries only.

A1 A2

Driving170

of the steering wheel when the vehicle is n accident.

ver must always be securely engaged when t the position of the steering wheel cannot e this could cause an accident.

programme (ESP)*

safer in certain situations.

Fig. 146 Detail of the centre console: ESP button

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be adjusted as

required to suit the driver.

Push the lever fig. 145 down .

Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

Then push the lever back up against the steering column until it

engages in position.

WARNING

Never adjust the position moving, as this could cause a

For safety reasons, the le the vehicle is moving, so tha shift unexpectedly. Otherwis

Safety

Electronic stabilisation

ESP helps make driving

Fig. 145 Lever beneath steering column

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Data

ponding warning notes on ESP in page 189,

to start and stop the engine.

this position. To engage the steering wheel n the wheel until you hear the pin engage. You

ering lock when you leave the vehicle. This will

Fig. 147 Ignition key positions

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) contains the electronic differential

lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works

together with the ABS. If a fault in the ABS occurs, both warning lamps light

up, but if the ESP fails, only the ESP warning lamp lights up.

The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.

The ESP switch deactivates both TCS and ESP functions. The ESP, in spite of

being deactivated, will always self-connect when necessary if brakes are

being used.

The TCS can be deactivated when in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

For example:

When driving with snow chains,

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

When does the warning light switch on or flash ?

On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry

out a function control.

The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP

or the TCS is activated.

It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

WARNING

The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corres Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Ignition key positions

The ignition key is used

Position

The ignition key is inserted in

lock, take out the key and tur

should always engage the ste

help to deter thefts .

WARNING (continued)

A1

Driving172

or lever is locked after the ignition key has been

ping the engine

started with an original SEAT key.

ine:

the clutch pedal all the way down.

o neutral (automatic gearbox: gear

.

Fig. 148 Ignition key positions

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Switching on the ignition/pre-heating glow plugs

If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel (to take the

load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely. In the case of

vehicles with a diesel engine, the key is turned to this position to preheat the

glow plugs.

Starting the engine

The engine is started in this position. Electrical components with a high

power consumption are switched off temporarily.

After the engine has started, the ignition key returns to position by itself.

The ignition key has to be turned back to position before re-starting the

engine. The starter inhibitor in the ignition lock prevents the starter motor

from engaging when the engine is running, as this could cause damage.

Switching off the ignition

Turn the ignition key to this position.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key until the vehicle is stationary! Otherwise the steering lock could engage suddenly, which could cause an accident.

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the car, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could lead to injuries.

Note If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, it will be

necessary to leave the key in position for about 5 seconds before starting

the engine.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: After switching off the ignition, you can

only remove the ignition key if the gear selector lever is in position P

(parking lock). The gear select

removed.

Starting and stop

Starting the engine

The engine can only be

Vehicles with a petrol eng

Use the foot brake.

Manual gearbox: Push

Move the gear lever int

selector lever to P or N)

A2

A3

A2

A1

A1

A2

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Data

t outside temperatures above +8C, the glow

ome on for about one second. This means that

mediately.

ined spaces, as the exhaust gases are

ll throttle and extreme load conditions until the

l operating temperature, otherwise this can

nvironment running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

elp avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.

position page 172, fig. 148.

off until the vehicle is stationary.

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Turn the ignition key to position without pressing the acceler-

ator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Use the foot brake.

Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down.

Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: gear

selector lever to P or N) .

Turn the ignition key to position . The pre-heating indicator

light comes on while the glow plugs are preheating.

When the indicator light goes out, turn the ignition key to

position . Do not press the accelerator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).

When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine fails to start straight-away, switch off the starter after about 10

seconds and try again after about half a minute.

Glow plug system*

To assist starting at low temperatures, diesel engines are equipped with a

glow plug preheating system. The preheating time depends on the coolant

temperature and the outside temperature. Start the engine as soon as the

glow plug indicator light goes out.

When the engine is warm or a

plug indicator light will only c

the engine can be started im

If the engine will not start...

page 285

page 288

page 222, Refuelling

WARNING

Never run the engine in conf poisonous.

Caution Avoid high engine speeds, fu

engine has reached its norma

damage the engine.

For the sake of the e Do not warm up the engine by

Start immediately. This will h

Stopping the engine

Turn the ignition key to

WARNING

Never switch the engine

A3

A2

A3

Driving174

e applied firmly to prevent the

y rolling away.

r up all the way.

and at the same time press in the release

w-.

pressed and push the lever all the way

Fig. 149 Detail of the centre console: Hand- brake applied

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The brake servo and the power steering system work only when the engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Given that you will be unable to steer and brake as usual, this could lead to a risk of accidents and injuries.

Caution If the engine has been running hard for a long time, there is a risk of heat

building up in the engine compartment after the engine has been switched

off; this could cause engine damage. Therefore, you should idle the engine

for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It may also start running again

after some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat

under the bonnet, or if the engine is already warm and the engine compart-

ment is heated up further by direct sunlight.

Handbrake

Handbrake

The handbrake should b

vehicle from accidentall

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake leve

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightly

button fig. 149 -arro

Keep the release button

down .

WARNING (continued)

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Data

at the, if the vehicle moves, it will do so towards

ecially children) in the vehicle when it is delay assistance in an emergency, potentially

upervised in the vehicle. They could release ever, moving the vehicle and causing an

tic system

to help you when parking or manoeuvring in

he equipment fitted on your vehicle.

s an acoustic warning if there are any obstacles

.

arking system plus warns you acoustically and

ront of and behind the vehicle page 176.

g aid works properly, the sensors must be kept

e.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a

warning buzzer and the display will show the message:

Handbrake applied

The handbrake warning is enabled after driving for 3 seconds at a speed

above 5 km/h.

The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied

with the ignition on.

WARNING

Please note that the handbrake should be released all the way. If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident.

Caution Once the vehicle has come to a standstill, always apply the handbrake firmly

and then, on a manual gearbox, engage a gear, or select P on an automatic.

Parking

The following points will ensure there is no risk of the car

rolling away accidentally after it is parked.

Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.

Apply handbrake firmly.

Switch the engine off.

On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear or on an automatic move

the selector lever to P .

When parking on slopes:

Turn the steering wheel so th

the curb.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (esp locked. Locked doors could putting lives at risk.

Never leave children uns e.g. the handbrake or gear l accident.

Parking aid acous

General notes

Various systems are available

tight spaces, depending on t

The SEAT parking system give

behind your car page 176

When you are parking, SEAT p optically about obstacles in f

Note To ensure the acoustic parkin

clean and free of snow and ic

Driving176

detected by the system may no longer be

e car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

w bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

mage the vehicle in such cases.

n towing page 177.

us*

plus is an acoustic parking aid.

t and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect

y acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring

about:

th increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

at a constant distance from a detected

d if the obstacle is closer than 0.30 m).

e 0.90 m

ntre 1.20 m

e 0.60 m

ntre 1.60 m

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

SEAT parking system*

The SEAT parking system is an acoustic parking aid.

Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,

you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring range of the

sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the

obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4

seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected

obstacle (it will not be reduced if the obstacle is closer than 0.30 m).

The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close watch on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacles

registered by the sensors as th

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer dra

system, so take care not to da

Note Please refer to the notes o

SEAT parking system pl

The SEAT parking system

Sensors are located in the fron

an obstacle, you are alerted b

range of the sensors starts at

The acoustic signals sound wi

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle the warning tone will

ately!

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remains

obstacle (it will not be reduce

Rear Side 0.60 m

Centre 1.60 m

Front Sid

Ce

Rear Sid

Ce

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Data

eplacement for driver awareness. The driver is afe parking and other manoeuvres.

pots in which obstacles are not registered. ildren and animals because the system will not pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-

on the area around the vehicle and make full .

s detected by the system may no longer be

he car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

raw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

amage the vehicle in such cases.

n towing page 177.

he picture display.

ing sensors are not enabled when you select

ch . This function may not be guaranteed on

actory fitted. This results in the following restric-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Enabling/Disabling

Enabling

Engage reverse gear or

Press the button on the central console fig. 150 or on the

gear selector gate. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone

and the LED on the switch will light up.

Disabling

Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or

Press the button or

disconnect the on button or

go out of reverse gear.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a r personally responsible for s

The sensors have blind s Always look out for small ch always detect them. Always dents.

Always keep a close eye use of the rear-view mirrors

Caution Please note that low obstacle

registered by the sensors as t

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer d

system, so take care not to d

Note Please refer to the notes o

There is a slight delay in t

Towing bracket*

In towing mode, the rear park

reverse gear or press the swit

towing brackets that are not f

tions:

Fig. 150 Centre console: switch for parking aid

Driving178

strument panel lights up when the cruise

control system should not be used in dense (such as slippery surfaces, heavy rain, loose ause an accident.

rbox: do not go into neutral if the device is

leasing the clutch, as the engine will increase

ditions, could break down.

ntain a constant speed when travelling down

to accelerate under its own weight. Change

ime or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

SEAT parking system*

There is no distance warning.

SEAT parking system plus*

There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when

obstacles are detected while driving forwards.

Fault messages*

If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts

flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.

Please have the fault corrected by a Dealer or specialist garage.

Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be

indicated by the flashing LED on the switch * the next time you switch on

the parking aid.

Cruise control (GRA)

Introduction

The cruise control system allows you to maintain a constant

speed.

Using this equipment, any speed over 30 km/h can be kept constant up to the

power output of the engine. This is subject to power output and braking

ability of the engine. This helps to reduce fatigue, especially on long jour-

neys.

The indicator light in the in

control system is operating.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the cruise traffic or poor road conditions grit or gravel), as this could c

Caution On vehicles with a manual gea

enabled without previously re

its revs and, under certain con

Note The cruise control cannot mai

steep hills. The vehicle tends

down to a lower gear in good t

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Data

eed can be adjusted up or down as

towards fig. 151 .

ore the current cruising speed.

n towards fig. 151 .

ore the current cruising speed.

et speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly

up towards fig. 151 .

et speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly

down towards fig. 151 .

tor pedal momentarily to increase speed. The

d will be automatically resumed when the accel-

ds the programmed speed by more than 10

s, the programmed speed will be deleted. You

eed again.

A+

A-

A+

A-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Setting speed

The desired cruising speed needs to be stored in the memory.

Drive at the desired speed.

Pull the lever to position fig. 151 to enable the system.

Briefly press button .

When button is released, the current speed is stored in the memory and

the vehicle will then maintain this speed.

Adjusting stored speed

The desired cruising sp

required.

Acceleration

Move the lever up

Release the lever to st

Decelerating

Move the lever dow

Release the lever to st

Pressing lever briefly

You can increase the s

pressing the lever

You can decrease the s

pressing the lever

You can also use the accelera

previously programmed spee

erator pedal is released.

However, if the vehicle excee

km/h for more than 5 minute

will then need to enter the sp

Fig. 151 Controls for the cruise control system

AA A1

AB

AB

AA

AA

AA

AA

AA

Driving180

ed only if this is not excessive for the current o so could result in an accident.

trol

179, fig. 151 to position (click stop

nary

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Disabling cruise control temporarily

Press the brake pedal or

the clutch or

press the lever fig. 152 to position (click stop not

engaged).

Any intervention of the TCS or the ESP will switch off the cruise

control.

The speed stored at this point remains in the memory if the system is only

temporarily deactivated.

To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the clutch or brake pedal

and pull the lever to position .

If no speed was stored when the system was temporarily disabled, a new

speed can be set as follows: drive at the desired cruising speed and briefly

press button page 179, fig. 151 (SET).

WARNING

Retrieve the programmed spe traffic conditions. Failure to d

Disabling the cruise con

While driving

Move lever page

engaged).

While the vehicle is statio

Switch the ignition off.

Fig. 152 Controls for the cruise control system

AA Aa

AA Ab

AB

AA

Driving 181

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.

gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

he gear lever while driving. The pressure of your

wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch fully to avoid

ge.

e clutch up hills. This causes premature wear

x*

(7-speed gearbox)

itronic gearbox

an electronically controlled continuously vari- ic). Unlike conventional automatics, the gear

steps but are continuously variable. This gives

akes for better fuel economy.

ratio and shifts up or down automatically

programmes stored in the control unit

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Manual gearbox

Driving a car with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gear

The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the

clutch down thoroughly.

Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards.

Slide the gear lever to the left, and then into the reverse position

shown on the gear stick.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

The reverse lights light up when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu

Never select the reverse dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on t

hand could cause premature

When changing gear, you

unnecessary wear and dama

Do not hold the car on th

and damage to the clutch.

Automatic gearbo

Introduction

multitronic, tiptronic

Applies to vehicles with mult

The vehicle is equipped with

able transmission (Multitron

ratios are not shifted in fixed

smoother transmission and m

The gearbox selects the gear

according to the gear change

page 186.

Fig. 153 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving182

still

e pedal.

rlock button (the button in the selector

selector lever to the desired position, for

the interlock button.

engage the gear (a slight movement can

press the accelerator .

hold the vehicle when stationary (for

).

rom rolling away, apply the parking brake

eep gradients .

te as normal, the parking brake will auto-

nd the vehicle will start moving.

e pedal .

.

rlock button, move the selector lever to P

k button.

d when the selector lever is at P or N.

to move the selector lever to P. On slopes, first

then put the selection lever into the P position.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 187.

Please note that on vehicles with a multitronic gearbox, torque is trans-

mitted via a multi-plate clutch, and not via a torque converter as on conven-

tional automatics. This means that the car will not creep as much as

conventional automatics when the engine is idling if you stop temporarily

with the selector lever in position D, S or R.

Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 7-speed automatic

gearbox. The gearbox changes up and down automatically.

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 187.

Driving instructions

The gears are changed automatically.

Moving away from a stand

Press and hold the brak

Press and hold the inte

lever handle), move the

instance D, and release

Wait for the gearbox to

be felt).

Release the brake and

Stopping briefly

Apply the foot brake to

instance at traffic lights

To prevent the vehicle f

before moving off on st

As soon as you accelera

matically be released a

Parking the vehicle

Press and hold the brak

Apply the parking brake

Press and hold the inte

and release the interloc

The engine can only be starte

On level ground it is sufficient

engage the parking brake and

Fig. 154 Detail of the centre console: Selector lever with lock button

Driving 183

Safety Fir Technical Data

s

he selector lever positions.

ition is shown in the dash panel.

mechanically. The parking brake should only be

ready stopped .

on in the selector lever handle) must be pressed

be depressed before moving the selector lever

This is only possible when the ignition is on.

d the gearbox automatically selects the lowest

ged only when the vehicle is stationary and the

Fig. 155 Display: Selector lever positions

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move

the selector lever from position P.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Your vehicle is equipped with the hill hold assist function which makes it easier to start off on a slope. The system

is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a few seconds.

When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be maintained for a

moment in order to prevent the vehicle rolling back when you drive away.

WARNING

While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to do so could result in an acci- dent.

Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. To do this, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could cause an accident.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. To do this, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Selector lever position

This section covers all t

The current selector lever pos

P - parking lock

This locks the driving wheels

used when the vehicle has al

The interlock button (the butt

in and the brake pedal must

either in or out of position P.

R - Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engage

gear ratio.

The reverse gear may be enga

engine is idling .

Driving184

rtment) when a gear is engaged with the le could otherwise start moving immediately king brake is engaged) and possibly cause an

the parking brake and put the selector lever the bonnet and working on the vehicle with bserve the important safety warnings gine compartment.

tronic gearbox:

entally to N when driving, release the acceler-

drop to idling before selecting D or S again.

y (and the environment), the gearbox ratios on

that maximum speed is only obtained when

n S.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

To move the selector lever to position R, press in the interlock button and at

the same time press the brake pedal. Depending on the model, one or two

reversing lights will come on in selector lever position R (when ignition is

switched on).

N - Neutral (idling)

In this position the gearbox is in neutral .

D - Drive (forwards)

In this position, the gearbox selects the optimal transmission ratio

depending on the engine load, speed and the dynamic gear regulation

program (DRP).

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to D if the

vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountains or towing a

trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to Tiptronic

mode page 187, so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit

the driving conditions.

S - Sport position

To drive in sports mode, select the position S. The engine power reserve is

used to its maximum. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to S if the

vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

WARNING

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

In selector position D or S the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The throttle must on no account be opened inadvertently (for instance by

hand from the engine compa vehicle stationary. The vehic (in some cases even if the par accident.

To avoid accidents, apply in position P before opening the engine running. Please o page 227, Work in the en

Note Applies to vehicles with tip

If the lever is moved accid

ator and let the engine speed

For the sake of fuel econom

some models are designed so

the selector lever is at positio

WARNING (continued)

Driving 185

Safety Fir Technical Data

orks if the vehicle is stationary or driving at

er speeds the selector lever lock in the N posi-

ally.

engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly

shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for

e backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow

k engages automatically if the brake pedal is not

position N for more than about a second.

elector lever handle prevents the driver from

ular gears. Press the button in to disengage the

tor lever positions in which the lock button has

e illustration, highlighted in colour fig. 156.

ey

rned off, the key may be removed only if the gear

the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever

designed to give maximum accelera-

itronic gearbox

pressed right down past the point of resistance

ill select a lower gear ratio, depending on road

ile you keep the accelerator depressed the

y controlled to give your vehicle maximum accel-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Selector lever lock

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion uninten-

tionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch the ignition on.

Press the brake pedal and at the same time press in the interlock

button.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition turned on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and

N. To remove it from these positions, press on the brake. The following

message appears in the instrument display as a reminder for the driver when

the selector lever is in position P or N:

WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR

The selector lever lock only w

speeds up to 5 km/h. At high

tion is disengaged automatic

The selector lever lock is not

through position N (e.g. when

instance, to rock the vehicl

or mud. The selector lever loc

depressed and the lever is in

Interlock button

The interlock button on the s

inadvertently engaging partic

selector lever lock. The selec

to be pressed are shown in th

Safety interlock for ignition k

Once the ignition has been tu

selector is in position P. While

is locked in position P.

Kick-down feature

The kickdown feature is

tion.

Applies to vehicles with mult

When the accelerator pedal is

at full throttle, the gearbox w

speed and engine speed. Wh

engine speed is automaticall

eration.

Fig. 156 Selector lever lock functions

Driving186

arbox: the gearbox continuously adapts the

brake pedal is pressed on a downhill gradient

fts to a lower gear ratio. This increases the

x: in mountainous areas, the gearbox adapts

ownhill gradients. This prevents the gearbox

necessarily on uphill gradients.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance

at full throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road

speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until

the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Dynamic gear control program (DCP)

The automatic gearbox is controlled electronically.

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled gearbox. The gear

ratios are selected automatically according to preset gearshift programmes.

When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox will select the most econom-

ical shift programme. It will then change up early and delay the downshifts to

give better fuel economy.

If you drive at higher speeds with heavy acceleration, if you open the throttle

quickly, or if you use the kick-down or the car's maximum speed, the gearbox

will automatically select the more sporty shift programmes.

The gearbox is self-adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable shift

programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gearbox switch to

a more sporty programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. Depending on

road speed, this makes the gearbox shift down early into a lower gear ratio

for more rapid acceleration (for instance to pass another vehicle), without

having to press the accelerator all the way down into the kick-down position.

After the gearbox has shifted back up it returns to the original programme,

depending on your style of driving.

Vehicles with multitronic ge

gear ratios to gradients. If the

the gearbox automatically shi

engine braking effect.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbo

the gearshifts for uphill and d

from shifting up and down un

Driving 187

Safety Fir Technical Data

ual programme

r from the position D to the right-hand

lector lever has entered the tiptronic rail,

splayed on the screen.

or lever forwards (in the Tiptronic gate)

r lever backwards (in the Tiptronic gate)

driver can manually choose between eight (on

even (on vehicles with tiptronic) different gear

gramme can be selected either with the vehicle

ox automatically shifts up into the next gear

engine speed is reached.

ower than the gear shown in the instrument

ox will only shift down when there is no longer

ne.

(for instance when braking), the gearbox auto-

next gear when the minimum engine speed is

ar increases the engine braking effect on down-

pressed right down past the point of resistance

ill select a lower gear ratio, depending on road

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

With the manual shift programme (tiptronic) the driver can

manually select pre-programmed gears.

Switching over to the man

Move the selector leve

side. As soon as the se

the gear engaged is di

Shifting up a gear

Briefly push the select

fig. 157 .

Shifting down a gear

Briefly pull the selecto

.

With the tiptronic system, the

vehicles with multitronic) or s

programmes. The manual pro

stationary or on the move.

When accelerating, the gearb

shortly before the maximum

If you select a gear which is l

display fig. 158, the gearb

a risk of overrevving the engi

When the vehicle slows down

matically shifts down into the

reached.

Changing down to a lower ge

hill gradients.

When the accelerator pedal is

at full throttle, the gearbox w

speed and engine speed.

Fig. 157 Centre console: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

Fig. 158 Display: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

A+

A-

Driving188

dle levers

e steering wheel enable the driver to

grammed ratios or gears.

d paddle lever to change down to a

nd paddle lever to change up to a

d when the selector lever is in position D or S,

shift programme (tiptronic).

can, of course, still be operated using the

sole.

Fig. 159 Steering wheel: Tiptronic controls

A

A+

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Back-up programme

A back-up system is in place if a fault should occur in the

control system.

The automatic gearbox switches to the back-up programme if a fault should

occur in the control system. This is indicated by a gear-wheel symbol which

lights up on the dash panel display (the symbol represents a gear pinion).

It is still possible to move the selector lever to all positions. The manual shift

programme (Tiptronic) is not available when the back-up programme is

active.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: When the selector lever is in position D or S

or in the manual shift programme, the gearbox will remain in 3rd gear if 1st,

2nd or 3rd gears were engaged when the fault occurred. The gearbox will

remain in 5th gear if 4th, 5th or 6th gears were engaged. The gearbox will

then engage 3rd gear when you drive away from a standstill or after the

engine is restarted.

It will still be possible to use reverse gear in the normal way. However, the

electronic lock for reverse gear will be switched off.

Caution Should the gearbox ever switch into the back-up programme, you should take

the vehicle to a technical service or qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Steering wheel with pad

The paddle levers on th

manually select pre-pro

Briefly pull the left-han

lower gear.

Briefly pull the right-ha

higher gear.

The paddle levers are activate

or the position for the manual

The manual shift programme

selector lever in the centre con

Intelligent technology 189

Safety Fir Technical Data

BS), the electronic differential lock (EDL) and

CS) are all integrated into the electronic stabili-

s data from the three integrated systems. It also

rovided by other high-precision sensors. These

about the vertical axis (yaw rate), lateral accel-

teering wheel angle.

wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

by the driver, and constantly compares them

the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

e car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-

g the appropriate wheel.

ed wheel bring the car back to a stable condi-

es (tendency of the rear to leave the road), the

eel facing the outside of the bend. If the vehicle

eave the bend), the braking force is applied to

de of the bend.

with the ABS page 190. If a malfunction

ESP will also be out of action.

ally when the engine is started and performs a

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Practical tips

Intelligent technology

Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)

General notes

The electronic stabilisation programme increases the

vehicle's stability on the road.

The ESP is designed to increase the degree of control in situations where the

car approaches the limits of adhesion, especially when accelerating and

cornering. It reduces the risk of skidding and improves stability in all road

conditions. The system is active across the entire speed range.

The anti-lock brake system (A

the traction control system (T

sation programme.

How it works

The ESP control unit processe

processes additional inputs p

register the vehicle's rotation

eration, brake pressure and s

The system uses the steering

changes of direction desired

with the actual behaviour of

maintained (for instance, if th

sates automatically by brakin

The forces acting on the brak

tion. If the vehicle over swerv

brakes will act on the front wh

under swerves (tendency to l

the rear wheel facing the insi

The ESP works in conjunction

should occur in the ABS, the

Disabling

The ESP is enabled automatic

self-test routine.

Fig. 160 Centre console with ESP switch

Intelligent technology190

self-check when the car reaches a road speed

accompanied by a noise from the ABS pump.

ning very slowly in relation to the road speed

system will reduce the pressure in the brake

made aware of this adjustment process by a

nd an audible noise. This is a deliberate

or more of the wheels is tending to lock up and

ntervened. In this situation it is important to

ressed so the ABS can regulate the brake appli-

brake pedal.

till subject to the physical limits of adhesion. ecially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice

ounteract locked wheels under braking), you tely to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do

res tempt you into taking any risks when result in an accident.

in the ABS, this is indicated by a warning lamp

helps the driver to achieve optimum

to increase braking power and thus to achieve

the driver presses the brake pedal very quickly,

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If required, the ESP can also be enabled and disabled manually by briefly

pressing the switch page 189, fig. 160. The ESP warning lamp lights

up when the system is switched off, see page 68.

In general, the ESP should be left switched on at all times. In particular

circumstances where a certain amount of wheel slip is desirable, it may be

advisable to switch off the ESP. Examples:

when driving with snow chains

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

when rocking the car backwards and forwards to free it.

The ESP should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

WARNING

The ESP is not able to overcome the physical limits of adhesion. Even with ESP, you should always adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Please bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery road surfaces. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the car's active safety

system. However, the ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter stopping

distances in all conditions. For instance, on loose gravel or fresh snow on top

of an icy surface (conditions which anyway require extreme care and reduced

speed), the stopping distance with ABS may even be slightly longer.

How the ABS works

The system runs an automatic

of about 6 km/h. This may be

When one of the wheels is tur

and is close to locking up, the

line to this wheel. The driver is

vibration of the brake pedal a warning to the driver that one

the ABS control function has i

keep the brake pedal fully dep

cation, but do not pump the

WARNING

The grip provided by ABS is s Always bear this in mind, esp that the ABS is working (to c should reduce speed immedia not let the extra safety featu driving. Failure to do so could

Note If a malfunction should occur

page 67.

Brake assist system

The brake assist system

braking effect.

The brake assist system helps

a shorter stopping distance. If

ESP

Intelligent technology 191

Safety Fir Technical Data

orks up to a speed of approx. 80 km/h. The

e it is working.

ll

d starts spinning (for instance, if one of the

pressing the accelerator gradually until the car

he braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

to excessive loads. In this case, the vehicle will

the same running properties as those of another

automatically when the brake has cooled down.

niformly slippery surface (for instance all four s the accelerator gradually and carefully. els may otherwise start to spin. This could sk of accident.

ld always adjust your speed to suit the condi- fety features tempt you into taking any risks o could result in an accident.

s up, this can also mean there is a fault in the

o a specialist garage as soon as possible.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

the brake assist system automatically boosts the braking force to the

maximum level, up to the point where the anti-lock brake function (ABS) inter-

venes to stop the wheels from locking. You should then keep the brake pedal

pressed until the vehicle has braked to the required speed. The brake assist

system switches itself off as soon as you release the brake pedal.

The brake assist system will not be operative if there is a malfunction in the

ABS or the ESP.

WARNING

Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive too fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. An increased accident risk cannot be compensated even by the brake assist system. Risk of accident.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

The electronic differential lock prevents the loss of traction

caused if one wheel starts spinning.

General notes

The electronic differential lock (EDL) helps the car to start moving, accelerate

and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be diffi-

cult or even impossible.

How it works

The EDL works automatically, i.e. without the driver's involvement. With the

aid of the ABS sensors, the system monitors the rotational speed of the

driven wheels page 190. If a considerable difference in revs is detected

(approx. 100 rpm) in the speed of the driven wheels, e.g. when only one part

of the surface supporting the wheels is slippery, the system applies the brake

to slow down the skidding wheel so that more of the power is directed to the

other wheels. The systems w

system will make noises whil

Moving away from a standsti

If one wheel has less grip an

driven wheels is on ice), keep

starts moving.

Overheating of the brakes

To prevent the brake disk of t

out automatically if subjected

continue to run and will have

without EDL.

The EDL will switch on again

WARNING

When accelerating on a u wheels on ice or snow), pres Despite EDL, the driven whe impair the car's stability. Ri

Even with EDL, you shou tions. Do not let the extra sa when driving. Failure to do s

Note If the ABS warning lamp light

EDL. Please take the vehicle t

Intelligent technology192

e optimal performance during the first 200 km

r, the reduced braking capacity may be

the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

-in.

ads depends a great deal on how you drive and

hicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

n heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving

effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter

ads. The brakes should be dried by pressing

g effect.

m/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake

ds the brake discs for a few seconds. This

e driver - at regular intervals and requires a

brakes when driving on wet roads.

s can also be temporarily reduced if the car is

out using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from

spinning when the car is accelerating.

General notes

The traction control system (TCS) is one of the functions incorporated in the

electronic stabilisation programme (ESP).

The traction control system (TCS) helps the car to start moving, accelerate or

climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult

or even impossible.

How it works

The TCS acts automatically, i.e. without the driver's intervention. With the aid

of the ABS sensors page 190, the TCS monitors the speed of the driven

wheels. If the wheels start to spin, the engine power is reduced automatically

to match the amount of grip available. The system is active across the entire

speed range.

The TCS works in conjunction with the ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the ABS,

the TCS will also be inoperative.

Note To ensure that the TCS works properly, all four wheels must be fitted with

identical tyres. The difference in size of the wheels may lead to an undesired

reduction in engine power. Also see page 248.

Brakes

General notes

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provid

they must be run in. Howeve

compensated by pressing on

loading the brakes during run

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake p the conditions in which the ve

instance, city traffic, frequent

and stops.

Wet roads; road salt

In certain conditions, such as i

through water, the full braking

by ice) on the discs and brake p

the pedal to restore full brakin

When the velocity is over 80 k

system moves the pads towar

occurs - without warning to th

more rapid response from the

The effectiveness of the brake

driven for some distance with

on the road in winter. In this ca

has to wear off before braking

Intelligent technology 193

Safety Fir Technical Data

of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,

ntervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

ith accessories such as a front spoiler or wheel

flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed,

rheat.

the driver when braking

pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

the engine is running.

move while in neutral, when the motor is uld result in an accident.

ing, e.g. because the vehicle has to be towed or

have to press the brake pedal considerably

k of servo assistance.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion

to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low

mileages without using the brakes very much.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times from a

moderately high speed .

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-

ified workshop and have the fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be

prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-

ping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.

WARNING

When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.

Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do

not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position

if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking

and prolongs the service life

it is better to brake firmly at i

Note If you wish to equip the car w

covers, it is important that the

otherwise the brakes can ove

Brake servo

The brake servo assists

The brake servo amplifies the

brake servo works only when

WARNING

Ensure the vehicle does not stopped. Failure to do so co

Note If the brake servo is not work

because it is broken, you will

harder to make up for the lac

Intelligent technology194

electronically adjusts the degree of

nic power steering the degree of power assist-

electronically according to road speed.

ervotronic system, the power steering will still

assistance will, however, no longer adapt to

nic regulating system is not working properly,

urning the steering wheel at low speeds (for

e effort will be required than usual. The fault

ified workshop as soon as possible.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Power steering

The power steering assists the driver when turning the

steering wheel (with the engine running).

The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the

steering wheel.

The power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering

wheel is very hard to turn.

If the steering is held at its turning limit when the car is stationary, this will

place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the steering

wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise. It will also

reduce the idling speed of the engine.

Caution When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power

steering.

Note If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off

(for instance when being towed), the car can still be steered. However, more

effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.

If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-

fied workshop as soon as possible.

The power steering requires a special hydraulic fluid. The fluid reservoir is

located at the front of the engine compartment on the left page 295. The

correct fluid level in the reservoir is important for the power steering to func-

tion properly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.

Servotronic

The servotronic system

power assistance

In cars equipped with servotro

ance page 194 is adjusted

If a fault should occur in the s

operate. The degree of power

different speeds. If the electro

this is most noticeable when t

instance when parking) mor

should be corrected by a qual

Driving and the environment 195

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing distance

braking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

e thickness of your brake pads checked by an

re frequently than recommended in the Service

for example, after crossing areas of water, in

ashing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-

et or even frozen (in winter): The brakes should

dal to restore full braking effect.

d faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.

n, or if you are driving on roads which have ng power may set in later than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and ar (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.

Up to 1,000 kilometres

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,

reduced.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes d

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have th

Authorised Service Centre mo

Schedule.

If you drive with wet brakes,

heavy rainfall or even after w

ened as the brake discs are w

be dried by pressing the pe

WARNING

Longer braking distances an of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 200 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad

If brakes are wet or froze been gritted with salt, braki

On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long s change down into a lower ge

Driving and the environment196

start it, use jump leads if necessary

running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

general, the exhaust warning lamp will light

symptoms occur page 66. If this happens,

aust system and escape into the environment.

o be damaged by overheating.

es very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

alytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust

ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

because the irregularity of the fuel supply may

allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

erheating and damage the catalytic converter.

vironment ol system is working perfectly, there may be a

ust under some conditions. This depends on

l used. Quite often the problem can be solved

of fuel.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes slip by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 220, Technical modifications.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gas purification system

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter

Always use unleaded petrol.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil

page 230.

Never tow the vehicle to

page 285.

If you notice misfiring, uneven

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest qualified workshop. In

up when any of the described

unburnt fuel can enter the exh

The catalytic converter can als

WARNING

The catalytic converter reach

Never park where the cat dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system. These materials cou

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank

cause ignition problems. This

system, which could cause ov

For the sake of the en Even when the emission contr

smell of sulphur from the exha

the sulphur content of the fue

by changing to another brand

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment 197

Safety Fir Technical Data

ting the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce

are listed below.

the traffic situation

n accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

ften and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

r engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of

and fuel consumption are reduced to zero

).

ergy

l is to change up quickly through the gears.

pm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

ossible, you change to a higher gear upon

the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

ions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

derate speeds will help to save fuel.

the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

an the amount of fuel needed to restart the

time to warm up when it is running at idling

pollutant emissions are also especially high

ase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

id running the engine at high speed.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for

the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. See section on

Warning Lights.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel

(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter

will be damaged if this mixture percentage is exceeded.

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ical driving style and anticipa

reduce fuel consumption by 1

pollution while saving money

As you drive try to anticipate

A vehicle uses most fuel whe

tion, you have to brake less o

let the vehicle roll with a gea ahead. The braking effect ach

brakes and tyres; emissions

(disconnection due to inertia

Change gear early to save en

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high r

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from

recommend that, whenever p

reaching 2,000 rpm.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at

consumption, exhaust emiss

higher speeds. Driving at mo

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off

crossings or at traffic lights w

30 - 40 seconds is greater th

engine.

The engine takes a very long

speed. Mechanical wear and

during this initial warm-up ph

after starting the engine. Avo

Driving and the environment198

ator, which produces electricity. With the need

n is also increased. Because of this, always

hen you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ty are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

ess

top priority in the design, choice of materials

eat.

cal recycling

signed for ease of dismantling

cilitate dismantling

ade materials

rs are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

an be recycled

ouped together for easy recycling

manufacture

ounds in plastics

onditioning

aterials laws: cadmium, lead, mercury, chrome

r manufacturing plastic parts

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum

reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine

does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having

driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

increases tyre wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round: they will increase fuel consumption by

up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

essary loads are being transported.

A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is

no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier

even when it is not in use.

Saving electrical energy

The engine activates the altern

for electricity, fuel consumptio

turn off electrical equipment w

ment that use a lot of electrici

heating or the seat heaters*.

Environmental friendlin

Environmental protection is a

and production of your new S

Design measures for economi

Joints and connections de

Modular construction to fa

Increased use of single-gr

Plastic parts and elastome

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used c

Similar types of plastics gr

Recycled materials used in

Reduction of volatile comp

CFC-free refrigerant in air c

Compliance with prohibited m VI.

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material fo

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Driving and the environment 199

Safety Fir Technical Data

dlights

nd drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

pped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

t apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available in your Authorised Service Centre.

headlights, the rotation system must previ-

this, please go to a specialist workshop.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

The use of water-soluble paints

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded

fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service

Centre may only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the

technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for hea

If you have to drive a right-ha

vice versa, the asymmetric di

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you mus

lenses. Further information is

In vehicles with self-directing

ously be disconnected. To do

Trailer towing200

ints which need to be checked before

an.

permitted trailer weights page 295.

ermitted trailer weights.

to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you

ly steeper gradients.

listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

increasing altitude the engine power and

g ability are impaired because of the reduced

ler weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

ust be reduced by about 10% for every subse-

). This figure refers to the combined weight of

ed) trailer.

eight that appear on the identification plate of

ification purposes only. The correct figures for

y be lower than these figures for the towing

tration documents and on page 288. Also

o that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Trailer towing

Trailer towing

Technical requirements

The towing bracket must meet certain technical requirements.

Your car is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage.

However, if suitably equipped, it can also be used to tow a trailer or caravan.

If your vehicle has been factory-supplied with a towing bracket, all of the

necessary technical and legal aspects for trailing towing have been taking

into account during manufacturing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole socket for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pole connector you

can use an adapter cable. This can be purchased from any SEAT Dealer.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car is purchased, this must be done

according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer

page 209.

WARNING

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a specialist garage.

Particularly in high outdoor temperatures, it is not possible to drive up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine would heat up.

Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk!

Notes on towing

There are a number of po

towing a trailer or carav

Observe the maximum

Trailer weights

Never exceed the maximum p

If you do not load the trailer up

can then climb corresponding

The maximum trailer weights

1,000 m above sea level. With

therefore the vehicle's climbin

air density. The maximum trai

weight of the car and trailer m

quent 1000 m (or part thereof

the (loaded) vehicle and (load

The figures for the draw bar w the towing bracket are for cert

your specific model, which ma

bracket, are given in the regis

refer to page 295.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer s

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Trailer towing 201

Safety Fir Technical Data

s additional attention by the driver.

oaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

s cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

stribution.

iler is reduced with increasing speed. Therefore,

he maximum permissible speed in an unfavour-

nditions. This especially applies when driving

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

stop the snaking by increasing speed.

in good time. If towing a trailer with an inertia then more severely. This will prevent brake

when they lock. Select a low gear in due course

ownhill. This enables you to use the engine

icle.

reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend

d when towing trailers with a high trailer load.

nstalled at a Dealer.

ot weather with the engine running fast in low

on the coolant temperature gauge page 60.

the needle moves to the right end of the scale.

ht in the instrument cluster should start

the engine cool down by running it at idling

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified

limit.

Tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressures on your car, and adjust for full load conditions

(refer to the sticker listing the tyre pressures on the door pillar). It may also be

necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the recom-

mendations of the trailer manufacturer.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the

standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors

fitted. The two exterior mirrors should be fitted on folding arms. Adjust the

mirrors to give sufficient rear vision.

Headlights

Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer

hitched up. If necessary, alter the height of the headlight beams by means of

the headlight range control. See page 120.

Power supply

When you remove the ignition key, the power supply to the trailer is inter-

rupted.

Removable ball joint coupling

Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable

ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well in the luggage

compartment together with the necessary fitting instructions.

Note If you frequently tow, we recommend you also have vehicle serviced between

services.

Notes on towing

Towing a trailer involve

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a l

unfavourable. However, if thi

for the unbalanced weight di

Speed

The stability of the car and tra

it is advisable not to drive at t

able road, weather or wind co

downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of swaying. Never try to

Anticipate hazards and brake

brake, first brake gently and

tapping by the trailer wheels

before going down a steep d

braking to slow down the veh

Swaying and pitching can be

having stabiliser aids installe

They can be purchased and i

Reheating

When climbing long hills in h

gear, you should keep an eye

Reduce speed immediately if

If the temperature warning lig

flashing, stop the car and let

speed for a few minutes.

Trailer towing202

um of three bicycles may be used.

ounted on the towing bracket

ly mount equipment (e.g. bicycle rack) which

n the ball joint. If you wish to attach other

that it has been approved by the manufacturer

mount unsuitable equipment, this can cause

. In an extreme case, damage to the towing

k .

pment which has not been approved by SEAT, ble for use on SEAT vehicles.

ssory equipment can result in severe damage could then break while pulling a trailer - Risk

d when fitting and removing the ball joint. ng device, no longer guaranteeing the correct This could lead to an accident.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Equipment and accessories

Before mounting equipment and accessories (e.g. bicycle

rack) please observe the following notes.

The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm

from the ball joint .

The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.

The maximum load depends on where the centre of gravity lies.

The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of gravity

and the ball joint increases.

The following limits apply:

If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)

must not exceed 75 kg.

If the distance is 600 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)

must not exceed 35 kg.

Only bicycle racks for a maxim

Equipment and accessories m

SEAT recommends that you on

has been officially approved o

equipment please make sure

for use on the ball joint. If you

damage to the towing bracket

bracket could cause it to brea

WARNING

If you wish to mount equi please ensure that it is suita

The use of unsuitable acce to the towing bracket, and it of accident.

Never use tools of any kin This would damage the locki working order of the bracket.

Fig. 161 Load distribu- tion of equipment and accessories

A1

A1

AA

AB

Trailer towing 203

Safety Fir Technical Data

h equipment, ensure that it is suitable for

towing bracket and that it is approved for this

to the ball joint from unsuitable equipment, we

for the towing bracket be purchased through

o page 220.

n the towing bracket of your vehicle if you are e bracket. The use of unsuitable accessory re damage to the towing bracket, and it could ailer - Risk of accident.

nd when fitting and removing the ball joint. ing device, no longer guaranteeing the correct t. This could lead to an accident.

or repair the ball joint or other towing bracket

culties when using the towing bracket, or

operly, contact a specialist garage.

check that the ball joint is secured properly

joint with the caravan / trailer still hitched or

accessory still attached.

the ball joint when you are not towing a trailer.

e is properly fitted on the mounting fixture on

re washing the vehicle with pressurised steam

ver piece is fitted correctly onto the mounting

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Removable towing bracket

Introduction

Special care is required when fitting and removing the towing

bracket.

The removable ball joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under the

floor panel in the luggage compartment.

On vehicles with a spare wheel fig. 162.

The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand.

Equipment / Accessories mounted on the towing bracket

Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuit-

able equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle rack).

Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dramat-

ically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could lead to breakage of

the towing bracket while towing .

Therefore, before buying suc

mounting onto the vehicle's

purpose. To prevent damage

recommend that equipment

your SEAT Dealer. Also refer t

WARNING

Only mount equipment o certain it will not damage th equipment can result in seve then break while pulling a tr

Never use tools of any ki This would damage the lock working order of the bracke

Note Do not attempt to modify

components.

Should you have any diffi

suspect that it is not fitted pr

Before setting off, always

page 206.

Never disengage the ball

with a bicycle rack or similar

It is advisable to remove

Make sure that the cover piec

the vehicle.

Remove the ball joint befo

equipment. Make sure the co

fixture.

Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: Spare wheel with towing bracket

Trailer towing204

p 2)

Fig. 164 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint

Fig. 165 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Fitting the ball joint (step 1)

Remove the cover piece fig. 163 on the mounting fixture

below the bumper as far as it will go. The cover piece is held

automatically in the open position.

Make sure the mounting fixture is clean. If not, clean it .

Cont page 204, Fitting the ball joint (step 2).

WARNING

It is important to keep the mounting fixture clean. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage safely and securely. This could lead to an accident.

Fitting the ball joint (ste

Fig. 163 Rear bumper: Open the cover piece

A2

A1

Trailer towing 205

Safety Fir Technical Data

ep 3)

Fig. 166 Removable towing bracket: Setting the spring mechanism to the "ready" position

Fig. 167 Removable towing bracket: inserting the ball joint

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Make sure the ball joint is clean and undamaged

Check the locking pin , release pin , shaft section and

knob page 204, fig. 164 on the ball joint to make sure they

are clean and undamaged.

The spring mechanism inside the ball joint must be in the ready position

Check that the red marking page 204, fig. 165 on the knob

is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the locking pin is inside the holes in the shaft

section of the ball joint.

Check that the knob protrudes visibly from the ball joint, so that

there is a clear gap between the knob and the ball joint.

The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the

ready position.

Cont page 205, Fitting the ball joint (step 3).

Fitting the ball joint (st AA AB AC

AD

AA

AB

AC

Trailer towing206

p 4)

Fig. 168 Removable towing bracket: Safety check

Fig. 169 Rear bumper: Pulling down the connecting socket

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Setting the spring mechanism to the ready position (if required)

Insert the key page 205, fig. 166 in the lock on the knob

and turn it towards the red marking.

Pull out the knob in direction , hold and turn in direction

until the locking pin engages and the release pin moves

out visibly .

inserting the ball joint

With the spring mechanism in the ready position, insert the ball

joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwards page 205,

fig. 167 in the direction indicated (arrow) . It should lock

into position automatically. You should now clearly hear it click

into place.

Lock the ball joint by turning the key to the green marking.

Remove the key.

Cont page 206, Fitting the ball joint (step 4).

WARNING

If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the ready position as described above, do not use the ball joint. Please contact a specialist garage.

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the knob or cover piece when inserting the ball joint in the mounting fixture. Otherwise, you could be injured.

Fitting the ball joint (ste A1

AA AB

A2 A3

Trailer towing 207

Safety Fir Technical Data

t

ck fig. 170 on the knob.

y turning the key to the red marking.

Fig. 170 Removable towing bracket: Removing the ball joint

Fig. 171 Rear bumper: fitting the cover piece

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Safety check

Check that the green marking page 206, fig. 168 on the

knob is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the knob is directly against the ball joint, so that there

is no gap between the knob and the ball joint -arrow-.

Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed so that

the knob cannot be pulled out .

Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the mounting fixture (try

moving it about to check).

Towing socket

To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, pull down the

socket below the bumper page 206, fig. 169.

If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again prop-

erly.

WARNING

To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one of these requirements is not met. If this is the case, you should contact a specialist garage.

Removing the ball join

Insert the key in the lo

Unlock the ball joint b

AA

Trailer towing208

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction .

Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it will go in direction

.

Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the ready

position .

Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting fixture

page 207, fig. 171. The cover piece will cover the mounting

fixture automatically .

Put away the ball joint attachment under the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

Move the socket back up to its original position.

WARNING

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the locking pin and the release pin when releasing the locking mechanism.

Make sure that the cover piece is properly engaged on the mounting fixture on the vehicle. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage securely if dirt accumulates in the mounting fixture.

AA

AB

A1

A2

Trailer towing 209

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 172 Attachment points for towing bracket

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing210

correctly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the racket.

correctly installed, this could cause damage to

.

ailer bracket is not recommended due to the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum resting weight.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

403

629 mm

1112 mm (vehicle with max. load)

from 350 to 420 mm (fully loaded vehicle)

1,000 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's

electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and

tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.

If the towing bracket is in accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b

Caution If the electrical socket is in

the vehicle's electrical system

Note For the Sport finish, fitting a tr

design of the bumpers.

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211

Safety Fir Technical Data

ain products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.

e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch andbrake firmly and remove the key from the

, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

environment.

re products should not be disposed of with ordi-

ve the disposal information on the package.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Your vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your car against the harmful effects of the environ-

ment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer

substances such as insects remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road

dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials

remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High

temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive

effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of cert they should be used in well

Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.

Before washing your veh the engine off, apply your h ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of

of water.

For the sake of the e When purchasing produc

which are not harmful to the

The leftovers of the car ca

nary household waste. Obser

WARNING (continued)

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning212

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ve often with clean water.

ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last with a different

ughly with water.

gently with a chamois leather.

ld, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces

ezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

ffect and braking distancethe brakes by

nition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-

matic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-

work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,

the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such

as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-

ator.

After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and

pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking

several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off.

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or glo

Special car shampoo sh

Clean the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry your vehicle surface

When temperature is co to prevent them from fre

seals.

After washing

Directly after washing,

page 195, Braking e

braking several times.

WARNING

Wash your car with the ig

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Water, ice and salt on the accident.

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning 213

Safety Fir Technical Data

d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

s by braking several times.

concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.

hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

ainted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is

wear on the material.

nce requirements

s the paintwork.

r car if water does not form small drops and run

lean.

uct is available from your Authorised Service

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided

wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage

system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted

bumpers.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

windows page 214.

Never use concentrate

Directly after washing,

page 195 the brake

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr

Water, ice and salt on th accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the ve

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers p

to the surface, the greater the

Vehicle paint maintena

Regular waxing protect

You need to apply wax to you

off the paintwork when it is c

A good quality hard wax prod

Centre.

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning214

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

liquid is accidentally spilled.

ontain solvents will damage the material.

xterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

ove snow from the windows and mirrors.

eather to dry the windows. The chamois

ces are not suitable to clean windows because

sits which could smear the windows.

y to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

t swinging it.

ne remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

with a special cleaner available in your Author-

sits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

leanser, specifically for removing wax, is added

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental

contaminants page 211. It is also effective in protecting against minor

scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-

able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 213, Vehicle paint maintenance

requirements.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plastic parts.

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved

solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if the

Cleaning products which c

Cleaning windows and e

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to rem

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois l

leathers used on painted surfa

they are soiled with wax depo

If possible, use a de-icing spra

it in one direction only withou

Use window cleaner or a silico

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed

ised Service Centre. Wax depo

blades to judder. If a window c

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning 215

Safety Fir Technical Data

ows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and

with a suitable care product (for example sili-

lso prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

ou should only use spray with lubricating and

th a damp cloth.

ith a soft, dry cloth.

ying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains and coatings from the

surfaces:

re product on chrome.

ome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax

deposits are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Rubber seals maintenance

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.

The strips on the doors, wind

last longer if they are treated

cone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will a

doors will be easier to open. I

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders y

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wi

2. Polish chrome parts w

If this does not provide satisf

product. Chrome cleaning pro

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome

Never use an abrasive ca

Do not clean or polish chr

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning216

ents should not be used. If the protective

one impact, the damaged area should be

lindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the

ident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry aking several times.

e

s coated to protect it from chemical

e.

damaged when driving. We recommend you to

nder the body and on the running gear, and

and after the winter season.

ur Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

sion work.

ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, t shields on the exhaust system. The heat of

gine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry page 195 the brakes by braking several times.

Cleaning alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.

Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.

Every three months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road

salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be

impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive ag

coating is damaged, e.g. by st

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cy and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash page 195 the brakes by br

Underbody maintenanc

The vehicle underbody i

and mechanical damag

The protective coating can be

check the protective coating u

reinstated if necessary, before

We recommend you to go to yo

work and additional anti-corro

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or an catalytic converter or the hea the exhaust system or the en

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning 217

Safety Fir Technical Data

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.

leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

rried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol

aintenance

panel cleaning

th to clean plastic parts and the dash

satisfactory results, use a special

aning product.

and the airbag module surface with cleansers ts cause the surface to become porous. If the ting plastic parts could cause substantial inju-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is

frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment

is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 227

Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the parking brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits

The polluted water must be c

engine washing should be ca

station.

Vehicle interior m

Plastic parts and dash

Use a clean, damp clo

panel.

If this does not provide

solvent-free plastic cle

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel containing solvents. Solven airbag triggered, disintegra ries.

WARNING (continued)

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning218

be removed using a mild soap solution

ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

k through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

reated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

ery sparingly.

ft, dry cloth.

to preserve the genuine qualities of this

tural properties of the specially selected hides

r has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

in everyday use and when looking after the

seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

ation for long periods, the leather should be

ding. However, slight colour variations in high-

mal.

olish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

n stains should be removed by a qualified

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning

Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two t

and a cloth.

Do not let the water soa

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be t

care product, available

Apply these products v

Then wipe off with a so

SEAT does everything possible

natural product. Due to the na

employed, the finished leathe

so a degree of care is required

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and

the vehicle is under solar radi

protected to prevent it from fa

quality natural leather are nor

Caution Do not use solvents, wax p

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubbor

workshop.

Your vehicle maintenance and cleaning 219

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

Check all seat belts condition at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.

Caution After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.

Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications220

the CE mark (European Union manufacturer

phone holders or drink holders, should never ithin the working range of the airbags. Other- ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

tions

ys be carried out according to our

the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

, other indirect systems may be affected by the

ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

r vehicle registration documents.

es cannot be held liable for any damage

or work incorrectly performed.

d you that all work should be performed by an

ng genuine and SEAT approved parts and

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend you consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess

the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For

this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts

used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or

are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), then they must bear

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers of, or w wise, there is a danger of inju

Technical modifica

Modifications must alwa

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in networks

faults. This can seriously impa

nents, and also invalidate you

SEAT Authorised Service Centr

caused by modifications and/

For this reason, we recommen

Authorised Service Centre usi

accessories.

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications 221

Safety Fir Technical Data

een*

dscreen have an area without athermic treat-

ror fig. 173. This area has been designed for

mponents of fitted devices (e.g. electronic toll

that the electronic toll collection system is fitted

re it works correctly.

Fig. 173 Location of the electronic toll collection system

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident.

Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of injury if the airbag is triggered.

Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

radio.

Athermic windscr

Vehicles with an athermic win

ment above the rear-view mir

the operating of electronic co

collection system).

Note The customer should ensure

in the correct area to make su

Checking and refilling levels222

kwise into the filler opening until it you

n.

he vehicle on the right.

operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

otes on fuel can be found.

e and can cause serious burns and other inju-

y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.

o not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident

ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:

l canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ld up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to explosive. Always place the canister on the

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 70 litres.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automati-

cally by the central locking.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Press the right side of the flap to open it.

Unscrew the fuel tank cap anti-clockwise.

Hook the cap onto the support fitted to the open tank flap

fig. 174.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap cloc

hear it click into positio

Close the tank flap.

The tank flap is at the rear of t

If the automatic filler nozzle is

soon as the tank is full. Nev

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for your

fuel tank flap. where further n

WARNING

Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca

Follow legal requireme

For safety reasons we d canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.

If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following

Never fill the spare fue trostatic charge could bui ignite. This may be fatally ground to fill it.

Fig. 174 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Data

k flap manually

eased manually if the central locking

right-hand side trim.

the fuel tank flap fig. 175.

Fig. 175 Luggage compartment: Releasing the fuel tank flap by hand in case of emergency

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

cause damage.

When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle

with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds

without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take

longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing. This is due

to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Releasing the tan

The tank flap can be rel

system fails to operate.

Open the tailgate.

Open the cover in the

Pull the ring to unlock

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels224

the quality of the petrol.

nces running behaviour, performance and

his reason, you should use good quality petrol

ditives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

deposits from building up in the engine.

tives is not available or engine problems occur,

e added during refuelling.

o DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

N) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

el fuel.

2.

ly with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.

obtained from rapeseed oil.

ation for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,

e.

.

viation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside the

fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be

used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Standard).

Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

= Regulation Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of

petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-

mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

consumption and engine power.

The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the

engine. Section Technical Data

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

However, the so-called bioethanol fuels available at commercial establish-

ments, e.g. with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of

ethanol, may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.

Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using

petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the

catalytic converter.

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve

The quality of the petrol influe

service life of the engine. For t

containing additives. These ad

fuel system clean and prevent

If good quality petrol with addi

the required additives must b

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond t

must have a cetane number (C

the ignition quality of the dies

Notes on refuelling page 22

Biodiesel*

The biodiesel fuel must comp

Biodiesel is a methyl ester

DIN is the German abbrevi

the German standards institut

EN means European Norm

FAME is the English abbre

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Data

inter.

iesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

se the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

l fuel is available in some countries during the

t temperatures as low as -22C.

matic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

country concerned regarding the type of diesel

el filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for

res that the fuel system remains operational to

use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.

d to such an extent that the engine will not start

C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

inners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle

has been prepared for biodiesel use.

Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)

The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.

Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.

RME fuel is resistant to the cold down to approx. -10C.

At temperatures below -10C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.

Your vehicle is designed to be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%

blended biodiesel, in accordance with the DIN 51628 standard.

Caution RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably

adjusted.

If you refuel with biodiesel, please be sure that it conforms to the

DIN E 14.214 standard.

If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel

filter could become clogged.

Note In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of

higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of

the independent heating.

The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For

this reason, we recommend you that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a

fuel change, the fuel filter change must also be done. Also note the instruc-

tions in the Inspection and Maintenance plan.

If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we

recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in

order to avoid damage to the injection system.

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in w

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade d

sub-zero temperatures becau

Therefore, winter-grade diese

cold months. It can be used a

In countries with different cli

has different temperature cha

Centre or filling stations in the

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fu

operation in winter. This ensu

approx. -24C, provided you

However, if the fuel has waxe

at temperatures of under -24

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (th

Checking and refilling levels226

t make sure that the windscreen wiper

m the glass. Otherwise the paint may be

.

under the bonnet upwards fig. 177.

ester hook under the bonnet.

by a gas-filled strut.

Fig. 177 Release catch under the bonnet

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

The bonnet

Releasing the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the instrument panel

fig. 176 in the direction indicated (arrow).

The bonnet springs out of its lock.

Opening the bonnet

Before opening the bonne

arms are not lifted away fro

damaged.

Lift the bonnet slightly

Press the release catch

This will release the arr

Open the bonnet.

The bonnet is held in position

Fig. 176 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Data

ort circuits in the electrical system, especially y.

fan while the engine is hot, as the fan could

n tank when the engine is hot. The cooling

arms from any hot steam or hot liquid coolant with a large, thick rag when opening the

rformed with the engine running, there is an ating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator om the high-voltage ignition system.

ditional warnings if work on the fuel system or ssary:

e battery.

flames

ved fire extinguisher immediately available.

e sure the correct fluid is put into the correct

wise cause serious malfunctions or engine

nvironment th your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are

you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your

ge.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the engine compartment. Failure to comply could result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet.

Work in the engine compartment

Extra caution is necessary when working on components in

the engine compartment.

Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or even fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Therefore, always observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area .

WARNING

Switch the engine off.

Remove the ignition key.

Apply handbrake firmly.

If your vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, place the gearshift lever in neutral. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever in the position P.

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Children should not be allowed to approach the engine compartment

Never spill liquids involved in vehicle operations on the engine compartment, as these may catch fire (e.g. anti-freeze containing liquid coolant).

Take care not to cause sh when working on the batter

Never touch the radiator start up suddenly.

Never open the expansio system is under pressure.

Protect face, hands and released by covering the cap expansion tank.

If any tests have to be pe extra safety risk from the rot and radiator fan, etc., and fr

Observe the following ad the electrical system is nece

Always disconnect th

Do not smoke.

Never work near open

Always keep an appro

Caution When topping up fluids, mak

filler opening. This can other

damage.

For the sake of the e Inspect the ground undernea

detected at an early stage. If

vehicle inspected in the gara

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels228

or your engine are listed in the page 229,

uoted (VW standards) appear on the container

with other specifications.

s (Extended Service Intervals*)

een developed in the framework of the SEAT

Intervals Maintenance Programme

f you intend to take advantage of the prolonga-

als in the framework of the Extended Service

with oil intended for fixed service intervals, as

ded service intervals are then no longer guar-

stances, if the engine oil level is too low

s not available, it is permitted to top up (once)

als page 229 (up to a maximum of 0.5

are not applied to your vehicle, you can use

page 229. In this case, your vehicle must be

of 1 year / 15,000 km (10,000 miles) (see the

es, if the engine oil level is too low

btain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can

onforming to the specification ACEA A2 or

EA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5l).

te filter*

tes whether your vehicle is fitted with a diesel

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Note On right-hand drive vehicles some of the containers/ reservoirs mentioned

below are located on the other side of the engine compartment.

Closing the bonnet

To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the spring pres-

sure.

Leave the bonnet secured in the locking part. Do not tighten

.

WARNING

For safety reasons the bonnet must always be completely closed when the vehicle is moving. After closing it always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the adjacent body panels.

Should you notice that the bonnet is not safely secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Engine oil

General notes

We recommend that the oil change should be performed by an Authorised

Service Centre or a qualified workshop, according to the Maintenance

Program.

The correct oil specifications f

Oil properties.

Check that the specifications q

either singly or in combination

Flexible maintenance interval

Special lubricating oils have b

Booklet Extended Service

page 229.

This type of oil must be used i

tion of the maintenance interv

Intervals program.

Do not mix the LongLife oil

the requirements for the exten

anteed.

Only in exceptional circum

page 230 and LongLife oil i

with oil for fixed service interv litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If Extended Service Intervals

oils for fixed service intervals

serviced after a fixed interval

Maintenance Program).

In exceptional circumstanc

page 230 and you cannot o

put in a small quantity of oil c

ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or AC

Vehicles with diesel particula

The Maintenance Program sta

particulate filter.

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Data

ly not suitable for all year round use, due to

climate that is constantly very cold or very

mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

not covered by the warranty.

end finding an engine oil that conforms to the

ions and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

be available for a top-up if needed.

Specification

VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

therwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

nded Service Intervals*

Specification

VW 504 00

VW 507 00

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter must only be filled with VW 507 00

engine oil.

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low

page 230 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, can you

put in a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,

VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5l).

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.

When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

period, an oil change is not required.

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are general

ranges of viscosity3).

These oils are only useful in a

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be

caused by these additives is

Note Before a long trip, we recomm

corresponding VW specificat

correct engine oil will always

Fig. 178 Types of oil according to temperature

Engine type

Petrol

Diesel Engines with Particu-

late filter (DPF)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, o

Exte

Engine type

Petrol

Diesel

3) Viscosity: oil density

Checking and refilling levels230

fter topping up the oil level should be in

After topping up the oil level should be in

nd the conditions in which the car is used, oil

l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

herefore, the engine oil level must be checked

when filling the tank and before a journey.

il

oil filler opening page 295, fig. 246.

Fig. 180 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Checking the oil level

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature

is reached then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level fig. 179. If

the oil level is too low, add more engine oil page 230.

Oil level in area

Do not top up oil.

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. A

area .

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up.

area .

Depending on how you drive a

consumption can be up to 0.5

higher for the first 5,000 km. T

at regular intervals, preferably

Topping up the engine o

Unscrew cap from

Fig. 179 Markings on oil dipstick

Aa

Ab

Aa

Ac

Aa

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety Fir Technical Data

id coolant is to carry heat away from

amount of antifreeze is decisive in

system from freezing in winter.

ling system is filled for life at the factory, so no

The liquid coolant consists of a mixture of water

s a glycol-based antifreeze with anti-corrosion

uired depends on the temperatures to be

n. If the antifreeze concentration is too low the

in failure of the cooling system and heater.

t the factory with the correct amount of anti-

ed.

nsists of 60% water and 40% anti-freeze. This

ti-freeze protection at temperatures down to -

s the metal parts of the cooling system against

ling and significantly raises the boiling point of

ion must not be reduced by adding plain water,

m climates. The concentration of the anti-freeze

.

quired in very cold climates, the proportion of

increased. A concentration of 60% offers anti-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Carefully fill with the specified grade of oil page 229, adding

0.5 litres at a time.

After two minutes, check the oil level once again page 230.

Where necessary, add more engine oil.

Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push the dipstick all the

way in.

WARNING

When refilling with oil, make sure no oil falls onto hot engine parts. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Caution The oil level must never be above area . This could damage the cata-

lytic converter or the engine. Contact a specialist garage to drain the engine

oil if necessary.

No additives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the

use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment Oil must not be disposed of into the drains or onto the ground.

Always observe legal requirements when disposing of empty oil

canisters.

Cooling system

Liquid coolant

The purpose of the liqu

the engine. The correct

preventing the cooling

The your vehicle's engine coo

coolant needs to be changed.

and anti-freeze G12++. This i

additives.

Liquid coolant additive

The amount of antifreeze req

expected in the winter seaso

coolant can freeze, resulting

The cooling system is filled a

freeze for the country concern

In most cases, the mixture co

mixture gives the required an

25C and particularly protect

corrosion. It also prevents sca

the liquid coolant.

Countries with warm climate

The liquid coolant concentrat

even in the summer or in war

must always be at least 40%

Countries with cold climate

If greater frost protection is re

the anti-freeze G12++ can be

Aa

Checking and refilling levels232

lant level

can be checked at a glance.

on liquid coolant expansion tank

ngine is cold, it should be between the

s. When the engine is hot, it may be

mark.

rresponding general overview of the engine

be checked with the engine switched off.

itored by a warning lamp in the instrument

e recommend that it should be checked occa-

Fig. 181 Engine compart- ment: Liquid coolant deposit

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

freeze protection of temperatures down to approx. -40C. However,the

concentration of anti-freeze must not exceed 60%, as the anti-freeze protec-

tion would then drop and the performance of the coolant system would suffer.

Vehicles for countries with cold climates (e.g. Sweden, Norway and Finland)

have factory-filled anti-freeze protection for temperatures down to -35C. In

these countries, the concentration of anti-freeze should always be at least

50%.

Caution It is advisable to have the cooling system checked before the winter

season to make sure that the antifreeze concentration is adequate for the

conditions to be expected. This applies particularly if you intend to take the

car into a colder climate zone. If necessary, have the antifreeze concentration

increased to 50 - 60% as required.

Use only anti-freeze G12++ , an additive meeting the TL-VW 774G spec-

ification. Other anti-freezes may give considerably inferior corrosion protec-

tion. The damage caused by the use of these anti-freezes may lead to a loss

of liquid coolant, causing serious damage to the engine.

The anti-freeze G12++ can be mixed only with anti-freeze additives G11,

G12 and G12+.

Checking the liquid coo

The liquid coolant level

Switch the ignition off.

Check the coolant level

fig. 181. When the e

min and max mark

slightly above the max

Its location is shown in the co

compartment.

The liquid coolant level should

The liquid coolant level is mon

panel page 78. However, w

sionally.

Checking and refilling levels 233

Safety Fir Technical Data

ark. Excess liquid coolant is forced out of the

he filler cap when the engine gets hot.

een lost, wait for the engine to cool down before

re to do so could result in serious engine

der pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the gine is hot. Failure to comply could result in

d coolant can be a health hazard. Therefore, red in the original container in a safe place out

to comply could result in poisoning.

nvironment t be used again. Drain off the used coolant into

ose of it in the proper manner (observe environ-

rt running spontaneously.

to run for as long as 10 minutes after stopping

nition is switched off. It may also start running

hile if

lant temperature, or

ent is additionally heated up by the sun.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Liquid coolant losses

Any loss of liquid coolant normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. In

this case the cooling system should be inspected by a specialist garage

without delay. It is not sufficient merely to top up the liquid coolant.

If there are no leaks in the system, a loss of liquid coolant can only occur if

the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.

Caution Radiator sealants must not be added to the liquid coolant. Such additives

could seriously impair the function of the cooling system.

Topping up the liquid coolant

Be careful when topping up with liquid coolant.

Switch the engine off.

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the cap on the expansion tank page 232, fig. 181 with a

cloth, and carefully unscrew the cap anti-clockwise .

Add liquid coolant.

Screw on the cap tightly.

Make sure that the liquid coolant meets the required specifications

page 231, Liquid coolant. Do not use a different type of anti-freeze if

anti-freeze G12++ is not available. In this case, use only water and bring the

anti-freeze concentration back up to the correct level as soon as possible.

Always top up with new liquid coolant.

Do not fill above the max m

system through the valve in t

If a lot of liquid coolant has b

putting in cold coolant. Failu

damage.

WARNING

The cooling system is un expansion tank when the en burns.

The anti-freeze and liqui the anti-freeze should be sto of reach of children. Failure

For the sake of the e Drained off coolant should no

a suitable container and disp

mental regulations).

Radiator fan

The radiator fan can sta

The auxiliary fan can continue

the engine even after the ig

suddenly after some w

stored heat raises the coo

the hot engine compartm

Checking and refilling levels234

is listed in page 295.

ough to clean the glass properly. It is therefore

sher fluid additive (with wax solvent) to the

ze-resistant additive should be used in winter.

eze or other additives into the windscreen

ich contains paint thinners or solvents as it can

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

WARNING

when working in the engine compartment be aware that the radiator fan may start running suddenly, leading to the risk of injury.

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades

Windscreen washer system

Plain water on its own is not sufficient for the windscreen

washer system.

The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the

windscreen and the headlight washer system*. The container is located in the

engine compartment (front left). The filler cap is marked with the symbol

fig. 182.

The capacity of the container

Plain water on its own is not en

advisable to add a suitable wa

water. A washer fluid with free

Caution Never put radiator anti-fre

washer fluid.

Never use washer fluid wh

damage the paintwork.

Fig. 182 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

Checking and refilling levels 235

Safety Fir Technical Data

y from the windscreen.

on the wiper blade in the direction indi-

old onto the wiper blade at the same time.

out of its mounting on the wiper arm.

catch on the new wiper blade. The

blade should now be visible.

e into the mounting on the wiper arm

on the wiper blade in direction so that

he wiper arm.

k down onto the glass.

ar, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

esired results, the setting angle of the wind-

ncorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

cessary.

e good visibility through all windows!

switched on while the front wiper arms are in s would return to their park position and e bonnet.

AD

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing windscreen wiper blades

If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you

will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper

blades should be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm awa

Slide the retainer catch

cated fig. 183 . H

Pull the wiper blade

Fitting the wiper blade

Slide back the retainer

mounting on the wiper

Fit the new wiper blad

fig. 184 .

Slide the retainer catch

it clicks into place on t

Fold the wiper arm bac

If the windscreen wipers sme or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the d

screen wiper arms might be i

workshop and corrected if ne

WARNING

Do not drive unless you hav

The ignition must not be a raised position. The wiper damage the paintwork on th

Fig. 183 Removing the wiper blade

Fig. 184 Fitting the wiper blade

AA

AB

AC

Checking and refilling levels236

r blade

is essential for clear rear vision.

should be replaced immediately.

Fig. 185 Remove rear window wiper blade

Fig. 186 Fit the rear window wiper blade

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

To prevent smearing on the windscreen, the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly using a window cleaner solution. If the wiper blades are very dirty (e.g. insects etc.), they should be cleaned using a sponge or cloth. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

For safety reasons, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service

position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.

Changing the rear wipe

A good rear wiper blade

Damaged wiper blades

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 237

Safety Fir Technical Data

id level

n be checked at a glance.

between the Min and Max fig. 187 mark-

tly after a period of time due to the automatic

wear. This is quite normal.

n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

eak in the brake system. If the fluid level in the

e indicated by the brake warning lamp

f this should happen, take the car to a qualified ave the brake system inspected.

Fig. 187 Engine compart- ment: markings on brake fluid reservoir

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm away from the glass page 236, fig. 185.

Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove

the blade page 236, fig. 185.

Fitting the wiper blade

With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.

Place the blade as shown in the page 236, fig. 186 and slide

the adapter along until it engages.

Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.

If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned

if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to a qualified workshop.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the window.

Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake flu

The brake fluid level ca

The brake fluid level must be

ings.

The fluid level may drop sligh

compensation for brake pad

However, if the level goes dow

Min mark, there may be a l

reservoir is too low, this will b

page 70 and page 77. I

workshop immediately and h

Checking and refilling levels238

vironment ut of the brake system, use an appropriate

ake fluid and dispose of it in the proper

uires specialist knowledge.

nance-free and is checked in the Inspection

ce a battery once it is older than 5 years.

some of the vehicle's functions will become

ows). These functions will require resetting

d. For this reason, the battery should only be

's electrical system when absolutely necessary.

its charge because certain electrical equip-

t even when the ignition is off. If you park the

e in winter you should take the battery out of

st-proof room. Store the battery in a place

d become damaged. At warm outside temper-

nect the negative terminal of the battery. Even

cted you should charge it from time to time.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Topping up and changing the brake fluid

It is best to have the brake fluid changed by a professional.

Brake fluid absorbs damp. Therefore, in the course of time it will absorb water

from the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the

brake system could corrode. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid

will be considerably reduced. This could adversely affect the braking ability in

certain circumstances.

For this reason the brake fluid must be changed periodically.

Your vehicle's Service Schedule will tell you when the brake fluid has to be

renewed.

We recommend you have the brake fluid changed as part of a regular Inspec-

tion Service at your garage. They are familiar with the procedure and have the

necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for

disposing of the old fluid.

Use only the genuine brake fluid specified by the factory Specialist garages

know that the brake fluid -DOT 4- is factory approved. The brake fluid must be

new.

WARNING

Therefore, it must always be kept closed in its original container. Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the car, leading to the risk of accident.

Caution Please note that brake fluid will attack the paintwork on contact.

For the sake of the en If the fluid has to be drained o

container to catch the used br

manner.

Battery

General notes

All work on batteries req

The battery is virtually mainte

Services.

We recommend that you repla

Disconnecting the battery

If the battery is disconnected,

inoperative (e.g. electric wind

after the battery is reconnecte

disconnected from the vehicle

Long periods of non-use

The battery will gradually lose

ment continues to draw curren

vehicle for long periods of tim

the vehicle and keep it in a fro

where it cannot freeze up an

atures it is sufficient to discon

when the battery is not conne

Checking and refilling levels 239

Safety Fir Technical Data

ngs for handling a car battery

ack of the engine compartment page 295.

er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical

tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and

sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralize any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-

ts and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

ery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause

ion

ry corrosive and caustic. Wear protective

rotection!

ed lights and smoking are prohibited!

e mixture of gases is released when the battery

ay from acid and batteries!

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Winter operations

The battery is drained more in cold weather, which means that the starting

power is reduced. For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if

necessary before the start of winter.

Replacing the battery

A replacement battery must have the same capacity, voltage and current

rating. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted

battery and have sealed caps. The SEAT batteries which have been specially

developed fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety specifications for

your vehicle.

We recommend you use maintenance-free batteries.

WARNING

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. If work is required on the battery, this should be performed by a Technical Service or specialist garage. Danger of caustic burns and explosion!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the battery's liquid level. Explosive gas is released from the battery that could lead to an explosion.

Caution The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.

Before starting any work on the battery, always observe the warnings

listed under .

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead.

Therefore, they must be disposed in line with environmental regulations and

must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure discon-

nected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!

Important safety warni

The battery is located at the b

WARNING

Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:

Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.

Fires, sparks, naked ligh cables and electrical equipm charge. Never short the batt injury.

Wear eye protect

Battery acid is ve

gloves and eye p

Fires, sparks, nak

A highly explosiv

is under charge.

Keep children aw

Checking and refilling levels240

s important for reliable starting.

in Important safety warnings for

on page 239 and .

nd all electrical equipment.

both battery cables must be discon-

ive cable, then the positive cable).

bles to the battery terminals, noting the

for positive, black or brown for nega-

y charger to the power point and switch

ry: switch off the battery charger and

oint cable.

harger cables from the battery.

both battery cables to the battery (first

en the negative cable).

ent (for instance with a small battery charger)

have to be disconnected. However, both

nected before fast-charging the battery with

s follow the instructions given by the manufac-

or a battery is dangerous in Important

car battery on page 239, as it requires a

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0C.

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-

nents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect

the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Charging the battery

A fully-charged battery i

Note the warnings handling a car battery

Switch off the ignition a

Only if fast-charging:

nected (first the negat

Connect the charger ca

colour code (red is used

tive).

Now connect the batter

on.

After charging the batte

disconnect the power p

Finally disconnect the c

If necessary, reconnect

the positive cable, th

When charging with a low curr

the battery does not normally

battery cables must be discon

a high current. However, alway

turer of the battery charger.

The fast-charging procedure f

safety warnings for handling a

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 241

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

special charger and the corresponding level of knowledge. We therefore

recommend that this work should only be performed by a specialist garage.

A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0C. The battery must be

defrosted before charging . It is advisable to replace the battery if it has

frozen, because the ice can crack the battery casing and allow the battery

acid to escape.

The battery caps should not be opened while the battery is being charged.

WARNING

Never charge a frozen battery. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Wheels and tyres242

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

ttern

ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

rve the direction of rotation indicated when

ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

ximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- accident.

tyres. This may cause an accident.

ation or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

nflation pressure from the sticker. The

tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run-in.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pa

An arrow on the tyre sidewall i

directional tread. Always obse

fitting the wheel. This guarant

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have ma larly carefully to avoid risk of

Never drive with damaged

If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre i

values refer to Summer

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres 243

Safety Fir Technical Data

ng*

toring system constantly checks the

n the event of a loss of pressure by means of

e instrument cluster display.

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ach 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

being driven and the tyre pressure will rise

you should only adjust the tyre pressures when

ely at ambient temperature).

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

nvironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the

slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitori

The tyre pressure moni

pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver i

symbols and messages in th

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for e

heats up while the vehicle is

accordingly. For this reason,

they are cold (i.e. approximat

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres lead to in

Wheels and tyres244

rence or frequency characteristic changes on

ressure warning lamp will light up. The fault

ning buzzer. The position of the affected tyre

tyre is affected) on the centre display of the

frequency characteristics can change if:

.

tural damage.

pressures have been changed without initial-

g the tyre pressure settings).

he wheels of one axle (e.g. if you are carrying

left wheels is different to the road surface

ng period.

ains.

ttings (initialising the tyre pressure

e wheels of your vehicle, e.g. after modify the

fter changing of swapping around wheels

a standstill and the engine running - press

g lamp will light up. Hold the button down

g lamp goes out and an acoustic warning is

e button.

xtremely stress (e.g. heavy load), the tyre pres-

recommended value for the maximum load

inside of the fuel tank flap) and then initialise

n

n, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light

is a fault in the system if the indicator stays on

n the ignition. The instrument panel also

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least

one tyre is insufficient.

- Stop the vehicle.

- Switch the engine off.

- Check the tyre(s).

- Change the wheel if necessary.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

The type pressure monitor display on the instrument panel

indicates that the pressure is too low.

The tyre pressure monitoring system makes use of the ABS sensors to

compare the rolling circumference and the frequency characteristics of the

wheels. If the rolling circumfe

one or more wheels, the tyre p

will also be indicated by a war

will also be shown (if only one

instrument panel.

The rolling circumference and

the tyre pressure is too low

the tyre has suffered struc

the wheels or the inflation

ising the system (see Adjustin

there is a greater load on t

more passengers or luggage).

the road surface under the

under the right wheels for a lo

when driving with snow ch

Adjusting the tyre pressure se monitoring system)

After any incident regarding th

tyre pressure page 245 or a

page 180 - with the vehicle at

fig. 188. The yellow warnin

for 2 seconds until the warnin

given. You can now release th

If the wheels are subjected to e

sure must be increased to the

(see the adhesive label on the

the system.

Tyre pressure warning lamp o

When you switch on the ignitio

up for about 2 seconds. There

permanently after switching o

Fig. 188 Detailed view of the centre console: Button for the tyre pressure monitoring system

Wheels and tyres 245

Safety Fir Technical Data

is dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 189 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 190 Diagram for changing wheels

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

display TMPS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Please contact the nearest

specialist garage as soon as possible.

The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up if the tyre pressure on one or

more wheels is significantly lower than the tyre pressure setting which was

confirmed by the driver .

WARNING

If the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up you must slow down immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and check the tyres and their pressure.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. There- fore, the tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain conditions (e.g. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure warning lamp may not light up immediately or not at all.

Please ask your Dealer or specialist garage whether run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Fitting this type of tyre in an undue manner could lead to your driving licence being taken away from you. Furthermore, it may led to damage to the vehicle or, under certain circumstances, may cause accidents.

If you change normal tyres for run-flat tyres or vice versa, the control unit must be reprogrammed by the Dealer or a specialist garage.

Note If you did not press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system to

confirm a new tyre pressure setting after making changes to the tyre pres-

sures or changing one or more wheels, the warning lamp may light up

although the tyre pressures are correct. In this case, stop the vehicle as soon

as possible and, after examining the tyres, press the button for the tyre pres-

sure monitoring system.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres246

re balanced. However, various factors encoun-

se them to become unbalanced, which results

rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

ses excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

ssive wear, you should have the wheel align-

d Service Centre.

ccidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

d at the latest when the tread is worn down to lure to do so could result in an accident. Worn speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ar, you should have the running gear checked tre.

il, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

s must be replaced immediately!

vironment se fuel consumption.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 245, fig. 189, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably

and also impair the car's handling. The inflation pressures are listed on a

sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds. The

pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before

starting any long journey.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have

stored. The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function as intended if

you store tyre pressure settings for a normal load, but then drive with the

vehicle fully laden. The tyre pressure must be adapted to the actual load and

stored accordingly in the tyre pressure monitoring system page 244.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 245, fig. 190. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles a

tered in normal driving can cau

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be

wear on steering, suspension

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment cau

the vehicle. If tyres show exce

ment checked by an Authorise

WARNING

There is a serious danger of a

The tyres must be replace the tread wear indicators. Fai tyres do not grip well at high risk of aquaplaning

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive we by an Authorised Service Cen

Keep chemicals such as o

Damaged wheels and tyre

For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres will increa

Wheels and tyres 247

Safety Fir Technical Data

u contact Technical Service. If more than one

rgency conditions, this reduces the distance

y conditions

displayed on the instrument panel, this means

driven in emergency conditions .

e of the tyres,

,

to continue driving even using anti-puncture

ion Program (ESP) is out of operation.

oring system is out of operation.

n severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

re is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

off smoke.

conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and observe legal requirements when doing so.

pid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Anti-puncture tyres*

Anti-puncture tyres allow you to continue driving even with a

punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.

Vehicles equipped with anti-puncture4) tyres from the factory indi-

cate the loss of tyre pressure on the instrument panel.

Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)

Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)

switched on, or switch on page 68.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if

necessary. We recommend yo

tyre is being used under eme

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergenc

When loss in tyre pressure is

that at least one tyre is being

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from on

there is a smell of rubber

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible tyres?

If the Electronic Stabilisat

If the tyre pressure monit

If one of the tyres has bee

has been badly damaged the

off and cause damage to the

It is also advisable to stop

starts overheating and gives

WARNING

When driving in emergency considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please

Avoid sharp turns and ra 4) Depending upon version and country.

Wheels and tyres248

following information:

bol

vy-duty tyres.

o indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

).

ample, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

res and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

iar with the procedure and have the necessary

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

has full information on the technical require-

ging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

se only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

se with an unknown history of use.

ed, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

tted with radial tyres of the same type, size e same tread pattern.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

If one or more tyres is being driven in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.

Note The anti-puncture tyres do not deflate on losing pressure because they

are supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be

detected with a visual inspection.

Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency

conditions.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the

A direction of rotation sym

Reinforced denotes hea

The manufacturing date is als

on the inner side of the wheel

DOT ... 1103... means, for ex

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on ty

Service Centre. They are famil

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centre

ments when installing or chan

WARNING

We recommend that you u approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicle you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or tho

If wheel trims are retrofitt brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be fi (rolling circumference) and th

WARNING (continued)

Wheels and tyres 249

Safety Fir Technical Data

htened correctly, the wheel could become accident.

clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil

ich belong to the wheel.

l bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the accident! If the tightening torque is too high, can be damaged.

eel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

e the vehicles handling on snow and

res will considerably improve the vehicles

mer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

ee sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

ter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from

other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of

wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your

model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the

vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 220.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tig loose while driving. Risk of

The wheel bolts must be to them.

Use only wheel bolts wh

If the torque of the whee vehicle is in motion. Risk of the wheel bolts and threads

Caution The prescribed torque for wh

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter ty

handling. The design of sum

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated

specified for summer tyres (s

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted win tration documents. Use only

vehicle documentation also a

Wheels and tyres250

ly to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre

trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

ns provided by the snow chain manufacturer.

ains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

dling, damage the tyres and wear out very

ed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

try should be followed.

k your Approved Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

15 mm chains

9 mm chains

7 mm chains

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page 248, New tyres and wheels determines the

following speed limits for winter tyres:

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These

stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

ments of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel

page 248, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

sizes page 294.

Remove wheel hub covers and

reasons cover caps, available

fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Observe the fitting instructio

Caution You must remove the snow ch

Otherwise they will impair han

quickly.

Note In some countries, the spe

legal requirements of the coun

We recommend that you as

about appropriate wheel, tyre

205/55 R16

225/45 R17

225/40 R18

If and when 251

Safety Fir Technical Data

fig. 192 for vehicles with a spare wheel

yre repair kit are stored under the floor

partment.

and fold back the floor panel in the

fig. 191.

nt screw from cover fig. 191.

pulling up the handle on the box (vehicles

heel).

ck.

Fig. 192 Toolbox and jack

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 251 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Tools

The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the

luggage compartment.

The tools and jack

and for vehicles with the t

panel in the luggage com

Take hold of handle

luggage compartment

Unscrew the attachme

Remove cover.

Release the toolbox by

equipped with spare w

Take out the tools or ja

The tool kit includes:

Fig. 191 Access to the toolbox and jack

AA AB

AA

If and when252

is stored under the floor panel in the

and fold back the floor panel in the

ity system.

a Tyre Mobility System in case of a puncture.

ists of a container with sealing compound and

required tyre pressure.

ant compound and the compressor are

.

Fig. 193 Tyre Mobility System under floor panel in luggage compartment

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 252 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

A hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps

Box spanner for wheel bolts

A screwdriver with reversible blade

Towing eye

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Before replacing the jack in the storage bin, wind down the arm of the jack as

far as it will go.

Some of the tools listed are only provided in certain models or are optional

extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts, as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.

The jack supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Tyre mobility system

The tyre mobility system

luggage compartment.

Take hold of the handle

luggage compartment.

Take out the tyre mobil

Your vehicle is equipped with

The tyre mobility system cons

a compressor to generate the

Instructions for using the seal

included with the sealant can

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Data

with a steel spare wheel at the factory. The

meet the same performance standards as the

ecause of the wheel/tyre dimensions, rubber

tc. Therefore, note the following restrictions:

is designed only for your vehicle model. Do not

n any vehicle but your own.

erent driving characteristics when the spare

.

tended for temporary use after having a flat tyre.

a normal wheel that has the proper tyre dimen-

el rim wheel is different to that of the other

w chains suitable for the other wheels will fit it.

steel rim wheel, the tyre pressure must be on as possible. The inflating pressure must nsult the table containing the inflation pres-

anger of causing an accident. Use the highest the table.

80 km/h, as higher speeds can cause an acci-

, hard braking and fast cornering, as this could

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 253 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Spare steel rim wheel

The spare steel rim wheel is carried in the wheel well under

the floor panel in the luggage compartment. It is only

intended for temporary use over short distances.

Taking out the spare wheel

Turn the plastic knob fig. 194 anti-clockwise.

Take out the spare wheel.

Securing the defective wheel in the spare wheel well

Place wheel in spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.

Secure wheel by turning plastic knob clockwise.

Replace the floor panel before closing the boot lid.

Your vehicle can be equipped

spare wheel does not usually

wheels fitted on the vehicle b

composition, tread pattern, e

The spare steel rim wheel

attempt to mount the wheel o

Your vehicle will have diff

steel rim wheel is mounted

The spare wheel is only in

Replace the spare wheel with

sions as soon as possible.

If the size of the spare ste

wheels, it is unlikely that sno

WARNING

After mounting the spare checked and corrected as so adapt to the vehicle load (co sures). Otherwise there is d tyre pressure as indicated in

Do not drive faster than dent.

Avoid heavy acceleration cause an accident.

Fig. 194 Spare steel rim wheel

If and when254

ents when doing so.

scribed below.

r.

page 255.

ck page 256.

the flat tyre and then put on the spare

firmly in diagonal sequence with the box

l, there are still tasks to complete.

e defective tyre in the spare wheel well

ack in the luggage compartment.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 254 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Changing a wheel

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the car as far away from

the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as level as possible.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe place (e.g. behind the roadside crash barrier).

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage 1st gear.

When towing a trailer: Unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.

Take the tools and the spare wheel page 251 out of the

luggage compartment.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.

Caution If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent

the vehicle from rolling away.

Note Please observe legal requirem

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as de

Remove the wheel cove

Loosen the wheel bolts

Raise the car with the ja

Take off the wheel with

wheel page 257.

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts

spanner page 255.

Replace the cover.

After changing a wheel

After changing the whee

Place the wheel with th

and secure it.

Put the tools and jack b

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing the wheel bolts

e loosened before raising the vehicle.

far as it will go over the wheel bolt 5).

s close to the end as possible and turn the

turn anti-clockwise fig. 195 -arrow-.

far as it will go over the wheel bolt5) .

s close to the end as possible and tighten

ng clockwise.

rew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts* page 258.

Fig. 195 Changing the wheel: Loosen the wheel bolts

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 255 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

The inflation pressure of the newly fitted spare tyre must be

checked as soon as possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon

as possible with a torque wrench. It must be 120 Nm (always

when cold)

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the tightening torque

checked.

For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has

been checked.

Loosening and tighten

The wheel bolts must b

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as

Grip the box spanner a

wheel bolts about one

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as

Grip the box spanner a

the bolt firmly by turni

5) An adapter is required to unsc

If and when256

k under the door sill at the jacking point ing changed fig. 196 -arrows-.

the jacking point until the claw of the jack

rtical rib under the door sill.

e arm of the jack fits on the rib under the

and the movable base plate of the jack

.

he defective wheel is just clear of the

of the door sills mark the jacking points

nly one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit

points to the wheel arches is approximately 15

he rear.

Fig. 197 Changing the wheel: Jack

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 256 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt does not come loose, it may be possible to release it by

pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the

vehicle for support and take care not to slip.

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Position the vehicle jac

closest to the wheel be

Wind up the jack under

is directly below the ve

Align the jack so that th

door sill fig. 197

is flat on the ground

Raise the vehicle until t

ground.

Recesses at the front and rear

fig. 196 -arrows-. There is o

the jack anywhere else.

The distance from the jacking

cm at the front and 25 cm at tFig. 196 Changing the wheel: The jacking points

AA

AB

If and when 257

Safety Fir Technical Data

bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

ribed below:

g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

ol) and place them on a clean surface

lts and tighten them lightly using the

e screwdriver handle.

an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

dition and hub mounting surfaces. These

e fitting the wheel.

screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

rewdriver blade should be removed when the

on of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

cket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 257 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use

a large, stable base if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles)

use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.

WARNING

Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be

completed.

After loosening the wheel

change the wheel as desc

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts usin

screwdriver (vehicle to

fig. 198.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bo

hexagonal socket in th

The wheel bolts should be cle

wheel, inspect the wheel con

surfaces must be clean befor

The hexagonal socket in the

wheel bolts. The reversible sc

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific directi

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal so

tighten the wheel bolts.

Fig. 198 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

If and when258

ead pattern

ad pattern must be fitted so that they

ction.

be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

n. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

This is important so that these tyres can give

ssive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

rly important when driving on wet roads.

s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 258 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Anti-theft wheel bolts

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel

bolts.

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

will go fig. 199.

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.

Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.

Error code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tr

Tyres with directional tre

rotate in the correct dire

A directional tread pattern can

point in the direction of rotatio

cated when fitting the wheel.

maximum grip and avoid exce

If, in an emergency, you have

direction, you must drive extre

performance. This is particula

To benefit from the advantage

defective tyre should be repla

rotate in the correct direction.

Fig. 199 Anti-theft wheel bolt

If and when 259

Safety Fir Technical Data

not be used in the following cases:

rger than 4 mm fig. 200

damaged

ith very low pressure or a completely flat tyre

bility system) is described in the section

and in the instructions supplied with the tyre

) can be used at outside temperatures down to

note the following points:

80 km/h.

, hard braking and fast cornering.

e impaired.

ealed using the Tyre Mobility System are only ver a short period.

ant the tyre pressure monitoring system* may se drive carefully to the next available quali-

must NOT be used,

larger than 4 mm

een damaged

ng with very low pressure or a completely flat

ance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not mpound.

to come into contact with your eyes, skin or

A1

A2

A3

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 259 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System)

General information and safety notes

Repaired tyres are only suitable for temporary use over a

short period.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

In the event of a puncture you will find the TMS, which consists of a sealing

compound and a compressor, located under the floor panel in the luggage

compartment.

The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,

provided that the cuts or punctures are no larger than approx. 4 mm in diam-

eter.

It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.

The sealing compound must

On cuts and punctures la

if the wheel rim has been

if you have been driving w

How to use the TMS (tyre mo Repairing a tyre page 260

sealant can.

The TMS (tyre mobility system -20C.

WARNING

After repairing a tyre please

Do not drive faster than

Avoid heavy acceleration

Vehicle handling could b

Tyres which have been s suitable for temporary use o

After using the tyre seal malfunction. Therefore, plea fied workshop.

The Tyre Mobility System

on cuts and punctures

if the wheel rim has b

if you have been drivi tyre

Seek professional assist possible with the sealing co

Do not allow the sealant clothing.

Fig. 200 The Tyre Mobility System is not suitable for repairing this type of damage to tyres.

If and when260

puncture, park the car as far away from

ssible.

mly to prevent the vehicle from moving

is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

ers leave the vehicle and move away from

n and the compressor out of the luggage

Fig. 201 Repairing a tyre

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 260 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

If you do come into contact with the sealant immediately rinse the eyes or skin affected with clean water.

Change clothing immediately if it becomes soiled with the tyre sealant.

Make sure you do not breathe in the fumes!

If any of the tyre sealant is accidentally ingested, immediately rinse the mouth thoroughly and drink lots of water.

Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance if needed.

If any allergic reactions should occur get medical help immediately.

Keep the sealant away from children.

For the sake of the environment Used bottles of sealing compound can be returned to the Technical Service

for disposal.

Note If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull

it off like a piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the

sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.

Repairing a tyre

Preparations

If you have a flat tyre or

the flow of traffic as po

Apply the handbrake fir

accidentally on slopes.

Engage 1st gear.

Check whether a repair

page 259.

Ensure that all passeng

the danger area .

Take the tyre sealant ca compartment.

WARNING (continued)

If and when 261

Safety Fir Technical Data

ains lower than the value specified above

x. 10 metres forwards or backwards, so

read evenly in the tyre. If the pressure is

cification the tyre is too badly damaged

d using the tyre sealant.

s, stop to check the tyre pressure.

than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly

on! You should obtain professional

heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your ther road users.

ers wait in a safe place (for instance behind the

facturers' safety notes on the compressor and th the tyre sealant can.

uild up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar within 6 tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on!

ance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not mpound.

an 1.3 bar after driving about 10 minutes, the o not drive on! Obtain technical assistance.

to repair a tyre on a slope.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 261 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Stick the max. 80 km/h adhesive, which is included with the

tyre sealant can, onto the instrument panel where the driver will

see it.

Filling the tyre

Shake the tyre sealant can well.

Screw the enclosed filling hose onto the sealant can as far as it

will go. This will automatically pierce the foil sealing the can.

Take the valve cap off the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve

insert tool to unscrew the valve insert page 260, fig. 201.

Place the valve insert onto a clean surface.

Remove the sealing plug from the filling hose and insert the hose

into the tyre valve.

Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete

contents of the can into the tyre.

Then disconnect the hose and screw the valve insert firmly back

into the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre

Screw the compressor filling hose onto the tyre valve and plug

the connector into the cigarette lighter.

Pump the tyre up to 2.0 to 2.5 bar and monitor the pressure

shown on the pressure gauge.

If the tyre pressure rem

drive the vehicle appro

that the sealant can sp

still lower than the spe

and cannot be repaire

Final check

After about 10 minute

If tyre pressure is less

damaged. Do not drive

assistance.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in lights and place the warning own safety and also warns o

Make sure your passeng roadside crash barrier).

Please observe the manu the instructions supplied wi

If it was not possible to b minutes this means that the

Seek professional assist possible with the sealing co

If tyre pressure is less th tyre is too badly damaged. D

Caution Take special care if you have

If and when262

nd its failed electrical component.

using a screwdriver fig. 202.

failed component page 263, Fuse

m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

e fuse out.

(which will have a melted metal strip)

ame amp rating.

on.

ts are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

d end of the instrument panel.

dentifying the fuses are provided on the inside

a crank handle for operating the sun roof* by

fails).

Fig. 203 Schematic drawing of fuse box at the left-hand end of instru- ment panel: Fuses (without fuse cover)

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 262 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Note Do not use the compressor for longer than 6 minutes. Otherwise, it might

overheat. When the compressor has cooled down, you can use it again.

If tyre sealant should leak out, leave it to dry and then pull it off like foil.

After carrying out a tyre repair remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at

a qualified workshop. This will ensure that the Tyre Mobility System is opera-

tive again.

Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Fuses

Changing fuses

If a fuse has blown, it must be replaced.

Switch off the ignition a

Remove the fuse cover

Identify the fuse for the

assignment.

Take the plastic clip fro

blown fuse, and pull th

Replace the blown fuse

with a new fuse of the s

Fit the fuse cover back

The individual electrical circui

behind a cover at the left-han

Two spare fuses and a sticker i

of the fuse cover. There is also

hand (if the electrical system

Fig. 202 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

If and when 263

Safety Fir Technical Data

tion of the front passenger air- 5

10

10

10

10

rain/light sensor 10

hts (adaptive light) left 5

assenger's door 15

15

for convenience equipment 20

30

30

ailer (control unit) 30

ump for diesel 20

f 20

, automatic anti-dazzle interior

utomatic gearbox 15

15

Amps

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 263 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Caution Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a

higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. It could also cause

damage to other parts of the electrical system.

Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical system

must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Fuse assignment

This list shows the fuses which can be replaced relatively

easily by the owner.

No. Consumer Amps

1 Climate control 10

2 Footwell lamps 5

3 Heated washer jets 5

4 Radiator fan 5

5 Parking aid, automatic gearbox 10

6 Air conditioner (air purity sensor), pressure sensor 5

7 Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP), brake light

switch, clutch pedal switch, steering angle sensor 10

8 Telephone 5

9 Vacant

10 Self-directing headlights (adaptive light) right 5

11 Airbag and disconnec

bag

12 Diagnostic socket

13 Steering column unit

14 Brake lights

15 Instrument panel

16 Vacant

17 Tyre pressure control,

18 Self-directing headlig

19 Vacant

20 Vacant

21 Vacant

22 Driver's door / front p

23 Rear doors

24 Central electrics unit

25 Heater blower

26 Rear window heater

27 Electrical socket for tr

28 Fuel pump, auxiliary p

29 Vacant

30 Sliding/tilting sunroo

31 Diagnosis connection

mirror, reverse light, a

32 Towing socket

No. Consumer

If and when264

bulbs for exterior lights yourself:

pt for xenon headlights)

e changed by a qualified workshop:

ulb page 271

degree of practical skill to change defective

r to those bulbs which are only accessible from

t you have defective bulbs changed by a qual-

echanic.

lbs in the engine compartment yourself, be

ved page 227 in Types of bulbs.

alogen headlights

ith a bulb of the same type. The name can be

.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 264 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

The electric windows and electric seat adjusters are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automatically after a few seconds when the overload

(caused for example by frozen windows) has been corrected.

Note Please note that the above list contains all data at the time of going to press,

so it is subject to modifications. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to

the sticker on the inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your

model.

Bulbs

General notes

You can change the following

Main headlights: all (exce

Rear lights: All bulbs

Side indicator bulb

The following bulbs can only b

Main headlights: Xenon* b

Front fog lights: Bulb

As a rule, you require a certain

bulbs. This applies in particula

the engine compartment.

If in doubt, we recommend tha

ified workshop or qualified m

If you do decide to change bu

aware of the safety risks invol

Changing bulbs H

Types of bulbs

You must only replace a bulb w

found on the base of the bulb

33 Lighter 20

34 Diesel lambda-probe 5

35 Luggage compartment power point* 20

36 Wiper system 30

37 Pump for windscreen washer and headlight washer

system 30

38 Luggage compartment illumination, alarm 15

39 Radio, Amplifier 20

40 Horn 25

41 Vacant 30

42 Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) 25

43 Engine management 15

44 Seat heating 35

No. Consumer Amps

If and when 265

Safety Fir Technical Data

lighting system. By switching on the lights, the

of light is projected will quickly be demisted.

tinue to be misted.

tervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

ctioning properly. This is not only in the interest

n that of all other road users.

ake sure you have the correct new bulb.

rt of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth

rwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will

at generated by the bulb, be deposited on the

e.

moved to gain access to the bulbs for

t.

Fig. 204 Air duct on right side of vehicle

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 265 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge lamps* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a

short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper

manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This does

not affect the useful life of the

area through which the beam

However, the edges may con

Please check at regular in

lighting) on your vehicle is fun

of your own safety, but also i

Before changing a bulb, m

Do not touch the glass pa

or paper towel instead. Othe

vaporise as a result of the he

reflector and impair its surfac

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be re

the right-side headligh

Bulb Type

Dipped-beam headlights (halogen) 12 V/55 W (H7 LL)

Main beam headlights 12 V/55 W (H1)

Indicator light 12 V/21 W (PY21W)

Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W LL)

If and when266

s

Fig. 206 Halogen bulbs

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 266 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Unscrew bolts page 265, fig. 204.

Detach air duct from guide and take it out.

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been

changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push air duct into guide .

Halogen headlight bulb

Main beam headlights

Side lights

Dipped headlights

Side lights

Turn signal light

AA

AB

Fig. 205 Air duct on right side of vehicle

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

If and when 267

Safety Fir Technical Data

previously remove the rigid cover page 269,

bulb changes.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 267 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip

fig. 207 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

to insert).

Installation is in the reverse order.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Note Although it is not necessary,

fig. 210 for easier turn signal

Fig. 207 Indicator bulb

If and when268

nd the lights.

ver fig. 208 to remove it.

fig. 209 from the bulb.

209 inwards and to the right.

g it from the connection terminal and

nt so that it sits correctly in the cut-out on

correct lighting, the filament must be

g the bulb, you can check the position of

adlight glass.

order, ensuring that the rubber cover is

g.

bulb is working.

ings checked as soon as possible.

AA

A1

A2

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 268 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Changing the main headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Pull up on the rubber co

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig.

Remove the bulb. pullin

fitting fit the replaceme

the reflector. To ensure

vertical. When changin

the bulb through the he

Installation is in reverse

well fitted to the housin

Check whether the new

Have the headlight sett

Fig. 208 Main beam headlights

Fig. 209 Main beam headlights

If and when 269

Safety Fir Technical Data

and the lights.

210 in the direction of the arrow and

, separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

ig. 211 from the bulb.

ing fig. 211 pressing inwards to the

it the new one in the headlight casing with

ing to position it from below.

ing it and pressing it slightly while turning

sure correct lighting, the filament must be

g the bulb, you can check the position of

eadlight glass.

to the bulb.

ting the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

e operation.

bulb is working.

ttings checked as soon as possible.

A1

A2

A3

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 269 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing the dipped beam headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig.

remove the rigid cover

removing the two tabs

Pull the connector f

Unclip the retainer spr

right.

Remove the bulb and f

the tab upwards, start

Clip on the spring, rais

it anti-clockwise. To en

vertical. When changin

the bulb through the h

Connect the connector

Fit the cover, first inser

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during th

Check whether the new

Have the headlight se

Fig. 210 Dipped head- lights

Fig. 211 Dipped head- lights

If and when270

nd the lights.

12 in the direction of the arrow and

separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

b holder tabs fig. 213 and pull the

lso be removed by pulling on the bulb

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

sing on the bulb holder.

socket and press on the bulb holder. Fit

the side tabs and then closing the cover

re that the gasket sits well on the casing

ion.

bulb is working.

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 270 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Changing side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig. 2

remove the rigid cover,

removing the two tabs

Gently press on the bul

cover upwards (it can a

holder wires).

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pres

Insert the bulb into the

the cover, first inserting

and the brace. Make su

cover during the operat

Check whether the new

Fig. 212 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

Fig. 213 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

If and when 271

Safety Fir Technical Data

and the lights.

214 in the direction of the arrow and

, separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

he bulb holder by pulling on the bulb

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

ssing on the bulb holder.

socket so that the side of the bulb holder

15 and press on it.

ting the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

e operation.

bulb is working.

i-Xenon AFS headlights

with a bulb of the same type. The name can be

.

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 271 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing the side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig.

remove the rigid cover

removing the two tabs

Remove the bulb and t

holder wiring.

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pre

Insert the bulb into the

grip is vertical fig. 2

Fit the cover, first inser

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during th

Check whether the new

Changing bulbs. B

Types of bulbs

You must only replace a bulb

found on the base of the bulb

Fig. 214 Side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

Fig. 215 Side lights. Bulb holder grip in vertical position

If and when272

lighting system. By switching on the lights, the

of light is projected will quickly be demisted.

nue to be misted.

ervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

ctioning properly. This is not only in the interest

that of all other road users.

ake sure you have the correct new bulb.

t of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth

ise, the fingerprints left on the glass will

t generated by the bulb, be deposited on the

.

moved to gain access to the bulbs for

.

Fig. 216 Air duct on right side of vehicle

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 272 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

WARNING

Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm - risk of burns!

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge lamps* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

Caution Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. If not, a

short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper

manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This does

not affect the useful life of the

area through which the beam

However, the edges may conti

Please check at regular int

lighting) on your vehicle is fun

of your own safety, but also in

Before changing a bulb, m

Do not touch the glass par

or paper towel instead. Otherw

vaporise as a result of the hea

reflector and impair its surface

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be re

the right-side headlight

Bulb Type

Xenon bulbs 12 V/35 W (D1S)

DRL (day light) 12 V/21 W (P21W SLL)

Indicator light 12 V/21 W (PY21W)

Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W blue LL)

If and when 273

Safety Fir Technical Data

t bulbs

-beam/main beam)

Fig. 218 Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 273 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Unscrew bolts page 272, fig. 216.

Detach air duct from guide and take it out.

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been

changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push air duct into guide .

Bi-Xenon AFS headligh

Indicator light

Xenon headlight (dipped

Side lights

DRL light (day light)

AA

AB

Fig. 217 Air duct on right side of vehicle

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when274

reviously remove the rigid cover page 276,

lb changes.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 274 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Changing the DRL light bulb (day light)

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise, pulling it by the grip

fig. 219 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

to insert).

Installation is in the reverse order.

Note Although it is not necessary, p

fig. 222 for easier day light bu

Fig. 219 DRL light (day light)

If and when 275

Safety Fir Technical Data

and the lights.

fig. 220 to remove it.

r by pulling on the grip and turning it anti-

b in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-

ith a new bulb (press and turn clockwise

nto the socket with the tab facing upwards

l. Press it against the socket and turn

ging the bulb, you can check the position

e headlight glass.

tighten, making sure it fit properly into the

bulb is working.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 275 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition

Raise the bonnet.

Pull the rubber cap

Remove the bulb holde

clockwise fig. 221.

Replace the blown bul

clockwise to remove) w

to insert).

Insert the bulb holder i

and the grip horizonta

clockwise. When chan

of the bulb through th

Fit the rubber cap and

headlight casing.

Check whether the new

Fig. 220 Indicator bulb

Fig. 221 Indicator bulb

If and when276

nd the lights.

22 in the direction of the arrow and

separating the brace side and then

from the other end of the cover.

r by pulling on the grip fig. 223 (it can

ling on the bulb holder wires).

the bulb holder by pulling both pieces

sing on the bulb holder.

socket and press on the bulb holder grip.

ing the side tabs and then closing the

ake sure that the gasket sits well on the

operation.

bulb is working.

lb

e bulbs on the front passenger's side is the

hanged at a qualified workshop.

A1

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 276 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Changing the side light bulb

The procedure for changing the bulbs on the front

passenger's side is the same as on the driver's side.

Switch off the ignition a

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace fig. 2

remove the rigid cover,

removing the two tabs

Remove the bulb holde

also be removed by pul

Separate the bulb from

anti-clockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pres

Insert the bulb into the

Fit the cover, first insert

cover and the brace. M

casing cover during the

Check whether the new

Changing the xenon bu

The procedure for changing th

same as on the driver's side.

WARNING

This type of bulb should be c

Fig. 222 Side light

Fig. 223 Side light

If and when 277

Safety Fir Technical Data

must remove the rear light assembly.

ires a certain degree of practical skill.

Fig. 225 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the rear light

Fig. 226 Removing rear light from side panel

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 277 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing bulbs for rear lights (in side panel)

Overview of rear lights

Rear lights in side panel

Brake lights and rear lights

Indicator light

Removing rear light

To change the bulbs you

Removing the light requ

Fig. 224 Overview of rear lights

If and when278

er

ou must first remove the bulb holder.

s on the inside of the rear light unit.

bs fig. 227.

n the direction of the arrow .

ulb page 279.

Fig. 227 Retaining tabs on reverse side of rear light

AA

AB

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 278 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

A special retaining screw is used to secure and guide the rear light.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the tailgate.

Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle's tool kit page 251.

Use the flat-blade side of the reversible screwdriver insert.

Prise off the cover with a screwdriver in the slot page 277,

fig. 225 and remove the cover (with the retaining clips) from

the opening.

Carefully loosen the screw located behind the cover with the

screwdriver, turning it anti-clockwise (arrows) .

Gradually ease the rear light out of the housing ( page 277,

fig. 226 positions and ) by pulling alternately in positions

and .

Remove the bulb holder page 278.

Caution When removing or installing the rear light, take care not to cause any

damage.

Removing the rear light in particular can lead to the paintwork or rear light

becoming damaged. This is another reason why we recommend having the

bulbs changed by a qualified workshop.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear

light, to avoid any scratches.

Removing the bulb hold

When changing a bulb, y

There are four securing tab

Release the retaining ta

Lift the bulb carrier off i

Change the defective b

A1

A2

A3 A4

A1 A2

If and when 279

Safety Fir Technical Data

to fit.

seated correctly on the bulb holder.

er on the rear light and align it so that it is

nto the rear light until it engages.

ulb function

dicator light

ide/stop lights

Fig. 229 Securing the bulb holder in the rear light unit

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 279 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below

gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Re-install the bulb holder page 279.

Position of the bulbs

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy

Check that the seal is

Position the bulb hold

securely seated.

Press the bulb holder i

Fig. 228 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder: Example: Outer left rear light

Pos. fig. 228 B

A In

B S

If and when280

t unit in fig. 230 arrow in the

ht unit against the housing, first in posi-

ition , until that the clips engage firmly

s.

o the front side of the rear light unit and

driver, from the luggage compartment

t sideways to ensure it is correctly fitted.

the screw, with the notch pointing to the

k into the tool kit.

s for the rear lights are working.

Fig. 231 Luggage compartment: Location of the bolt securing the rear light unit

A1

A3

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 280 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Check that all four retaining tabs page 279, fig. 229 -arrows-

have engaged.

Re-install the rear light unit page 280.

Fitting the rear light unit

The rear light unit is easy to fit.

First place the rear ligh

housing.

Gently press the rear lig

tion and then in pos

in the rubber mounting

Apply gentle pressure t

secure using the screw

fig. 231 .

Try to move the rear ligh

Fit the cover back onto

rear .

Put the screwdriver bac

Make sure that all bulb

Fig. 230 Fitting the rear light unit

A2

A1

A2

If and when 281

Safety Fir Technical Data

der

en to change the bulbs.

Fig. 233 Remove the cover of the tailgate trim

Fig. 234 Remove the bulb holder

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 281 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Caution Take care when fitting the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to

the paintwork or any of its components.

Changing rear light bulbs (in boot lid)

Overview of rear lights

Rear lights in the boot lid

Rear light

Rear fog light

Reverse light

Removing the bulb hol

The tailgate must be op

Fig. 232 Overview of rear lights

If and when282

a bayonet fastener. The table below

ulb positions.

ive bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it

t.

ng it into the bulb holder and turn it to the

ny fingerprints from the glass part of the

bulb is working.

er page 282.

to fit.

r on the rear light and align it so that it is

to the rear light until it engages.

interior trim so that it engages.

lb function

verse light

de lights

ar fog light

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 282 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

You can access the bulb holder for the inner rear lights via the inside

of the tailgate.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle's tool kit page 251.

Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the cover page 281,

fig. 233 and detach the cover .

Press on the tabs page 281, fig. 234 in the direction of the

arrows and remove the bulb holder by pulling in the direction of

the arrow .

Change the bulbs page 282.

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

The bulbs are secured with

gives an overview of the b

Lightly press the defect

to the left and remove i

Fit the new bulb, pressi

right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove a

bulb.

Check whether the new

Re-install the bulb hold

Position of the bulbs

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy

Position the bulb holde

securely seated.

Press the bulb holder in

Fit the cover back in the

A1 A2

AA

AB

Fig. 235 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder. Example: Rear lights in the tailgate

Pos. fig. 235 Bu

A Re

B Si

C Re

If and when 283

Safety Fir Technical Data

n by the arrow fig. 236.

ment lights

A2

Fig. 237 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 238 Luggage compartment light

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 283 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Put the screwdriver back into the tool kit.

Make sure that all bulbs for the rear lights are working.

Side indicators

Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.

Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.

Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.

Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into

place.

First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

the tabs fig. 236, arrow .

Insert the bulb as show

Luggage compart

Fig. 236 Side indicator

A1

If and when284

ped fitting, unscrew the bolts fig. 239.

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

erse order.

Fig. 240 Registration light

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 284 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing on its inside edge

using the flat side of a screwdriver.

Remove the protective cover and remove the bulb from the

housing.

Registration light

To remove the tulip-sha

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 240.

Installation is in the rev

Fig. 239 Registration light

If and when 285

Safety Fir Technical Data

move the protective cover.

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

ve a sufficient wire cross section.

ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be

nother vehicle to start the engine.

the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's

ss section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol

for diesel engines.

ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

s are connected.

ust be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 285 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Sunroof light

Remove the bulb carefully, using the screwdriver on its flat side

fig. 241.

Use a screwdriver to re

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 242.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must ha

If the engine fails to start bec

connected to the battery of a

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

documentation). The wire cro

engines and at least 35 mm2

Note The vehicles must not tou

soon as the positive terminal

The discharged battery m

trical system.

Fig. 241 Removing sun visor light

Fig. 242 Removing sun visor light

If and when286

f the black jump lead to a solid metal

lted on to the engine block, or onto the

e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

ar the battery .

ch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

car with the flat battery and wait one or

ngine is running.

jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

er and rear window heater in the vehicle

s helps minimise voltage peaks which are

ds are disconnected.

ning, disconnect the leads in reverse

n above.

they have good metal-to-metal contact with

tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

nute.

AX

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 286 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

How to jump start: description

fig. 243 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .

1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 243

terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .

2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive

terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal

on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Connect the other end o

component which is bo

engine block itself of th

connect it to a point ne

5. Position the leads in su

contact with any movin

Starting

6. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the

two minutes until the e

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blow

with the flat battery. Thi

generated when the lea

10. When the engine is run

order to the details give

Connect the battery clamps so

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, swi

try again after about half a mi

Fig. 243 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

A+

A+

A-

If and when 287

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 287 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 227.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

If and when288

ng points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

e gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

ou are towing. Brake earlier than you

h a more gentle pressure on the brake.

towed vehicle

e remains taut at all times when towing.

ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 288 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 285.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Comments

Please observe the followi

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first unt

gradually.

Begin and change gear

matic vehicle, accelerat

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle y

would normally, but wit

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-rop

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a v

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-rop

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the tow

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experie

drivers should be familiar with

enced drivers should not attem

If and when 289

Safety Fir Technical Data

ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the

rting.

om the onboard tool set.

r by pressing down on the right hand side.

to the left, in the direction of the arrow

ear on the right below the rear bumper.

Fig. 244 Fitting the towing eye to front rear of the vehicle

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 289 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the indicators, horn,

windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be

raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be

carried out by a qualified person.

The towing eye should alw

notes page 288, Tow-sta

Front towing eye

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring fr

Remove the front cove

Bolt the eye to its limit

fig. 244

Rear towing eye

There is a towing eye at the r

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 290 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

General notes on the technical data 291

Safety Fir ips Technical Data

ations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data

via- n

Meaning

Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power

m Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

m Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

2 Carbon dioxide

Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance

of petrol.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 291 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical t

Technical Data

General notes on the technical data

Outstanding information

Important considerations

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence

over this data.

All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The

vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbrevi

Abbre tio

kW

bhp

at rp

Nm

l/100

g/k

CO

CN

RON

General notes on the technical data292

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 245.

in the Maintenance Program.

r

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Program.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway

/ CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 292 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Vehicle identification data

The most important data are given on the type plate and the

vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numbe

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emissions values

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (l/100 km)

Fig. 245 Vehicle data sticker boot

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

General notes on the technical data 293

Safety Fir Technical Data

vary from quoted test values, depending on

nd traffic conditions, the weather and the

ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

onal equipment fittings or for the addition of

e vehicle will increase .

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 293 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Data on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

istic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Note Actual consumption may

personal driving style, road a

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the bas

and without optional extras. T

weight of the driver.

For special versions and opti

accessories, the weight of th

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving

is then simulated.

Extra urban

cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently

accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday

driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Total con-

sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting

of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra

urban cycle.

CO2 emis-

sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to

calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is

then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-

sions.

General notes on the technical data294

ins, wheel bolts

ure values can be found on the inside of the

lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly

s must not be reduced.

ly to the front wheels.

of this manual.

nged, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

y wheels is 120 Nm.

least once per month. Checking tyre pressure tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is

ents, particularly at high speeds.

bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,

can be damaged.

our Authorised Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 294 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow

approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle

base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal

stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow cha

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre press

tank flap. The tyre pressure va

raised pressures of warm tyre

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

Consult the chapter wheels

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been cha

should be checked as soon as

ening torque for steel and allo

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at value is very important. If the an increased danger of accid

If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads

Note We recommend that you ask y

about appropriate wheel, tyre

Technical Data 295

Safety Fir Technical Data

ttery

filler cap

reservoir

dipstick.

pansion tank

n washer fluid container

fluid reservoir for power steering

nd refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

ve. These operations are described in the page 227.

tions, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are

f page 291.

arts may vary depending on the engine.

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 295 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Technical Data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Fig. 246 Diagram for the location of the various elements

Vehicle ba

Engine oil

Brake fluid

Engine oil

Coolant ex

Windscree

Hydraulic

The checking a

mentioned abo

Overview

Further explana

contained as o

Note The layout of p

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

Technical Data296

91 RONb)

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 296 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 HP)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 75 (102) / 5600

Maximum torque in Nm at 1/min 148 / 3800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm 3 4 / 1595

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal

a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the antidetonator petrol power. b) Slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 186

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 13,1

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1930

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1445

Gross front axle weight in kg 990

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1070

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 720

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1400

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200

Technical Data 297

Safety Fir Technical Data

95 RONb)

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 297 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 HP)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.6 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 110 (150) / 5700

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 220 / 1800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm 3 4 / 1781

Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super

a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the antidetonator petrol power. b) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 210

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2020

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1535

Gross front axle weight in kg 1065

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1085

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data298

5 RONb)

Automatic

230

5,4

7,6

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 298 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 2.0l 147 kW (200 HP)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1600

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.4 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 147 (200) / 5100

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280 / 1800

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm 3 4 / 1984

Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super 9

a) Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 235

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 7,6

Technical Data 299

Safety Fir Technical Data

Automatic

2075

1590

1115

1090

75

Automatic

750

1700

1500

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 299 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 l 88 kW (120 HP) CR

Engine specifications

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1565

Gross front axle weight in kg 1090

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1090

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Manual

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1600

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 88 (120) / 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 290 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Technical Data300

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 300 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 198

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 7,4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 10,9

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1565

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1075

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data 301

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 301 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Diesel engine 2.0l 105 kW (143 HP)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 105 (143) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 207

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1565

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1075

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1600

Technical Data302

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 302 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 HP)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 125 (170) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 224

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2075

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1590

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1090

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data 303

Safety Fir Technical Data

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 303 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

st Controls and equipment Practical tips

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1600

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data304

ars

Rear

1,523 mm

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 304 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,666 mm/ 1,772 mm

Height at kerb weight 1,454 mm with roof b

Front and rear projection 976 mm/ 1,048 mm

Wheelbase 2,642 mm

Turning circle 11.2 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,522 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve 10 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 4.8 l.

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

Index 305

tery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Long periods of non-use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239

tension device

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

cle rack

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

ke light

Failure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ke system

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 305 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Index

A Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Air conditioner

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Solar-powered blower/solar roof . . . . . . . . 169

Air duct

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 273

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 272

Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Airbag

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Anti-lock brake system

How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Armrest

Storage compartment in front armrest . . . . 142

Armrests

Adjusting the front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Ashtray

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Athermic windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Automatic gearbox

Dynamic gear control program . . . . . . . . . . 186

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Paddle levers (tiptronic mode) . . . . . . . . . . 188

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 171

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . . . . 188

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187

Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

B Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Bat

Belt

Belt

Bicy

Biod

Biod

Bon

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Index306

utomatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

ontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

CON Mode (economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

conomical use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

ey settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

emperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

k, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

verview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

partments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

the door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

box in glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

ing system

oolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

alfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

e control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

e control system

djust stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

isabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

isabling temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

etting speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

in airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

afety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 306 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Bulb change

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

C Car keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Sunroof: opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 113

Central locking system

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from inside

100

Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . 111

Security central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Switch on the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Changing the main headlight bulb

Main headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Changing the main headlight bulbs

Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Changing the rear lights

luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 235

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child safety seat

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Childproof lock

Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Climate control

Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Air recirculation (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

A

B

C

E

E

K

T

Cloc

Cloth

Coat

Cock

O

Com

In

In

Cool

Cool

C

M

Cruis

Cruis

A

D

D

S

Curta

D

F

S

Index 307

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

tric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Possible malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Switch on font passenger's door . . . . . . . . 110

Switch on rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switches in the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . 110

trical power point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

tronic differential lock

How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

tronic stabilisation programme

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

rgencies

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 256

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

ine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

ine compartment

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 307 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Data entry control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

DIS

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85

Disabling front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Disabling the airbag

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Distance display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Door catch/ tailgate warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Doors

Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Locking the doors manually if the central lock-

ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

CD and radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Door catch/ tailgate warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Handbrake warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Red symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Yellow symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Driver's seat

Assigning the key to the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Enabling stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

With memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Economically / With Respect for the

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Dynamic gear control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

E Eco

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Eme

Eng

Eng

Index308

restraints

ront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

ear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

emoving and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13

-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

ynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

aulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

daptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

utomatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 117

utomatic headlight control photo sensors . . .

117

oming home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

ront fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

eadlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

eadlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

eaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

ed

eats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

ed rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

ed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

tification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 308 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Oil pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Filling the tank

Releasing the tank flap manually . . . . . . . 223

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44

Frontal airbags

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Fuel

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Fuel level low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 85

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuel range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 85

Fuel tank

opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Fuse

Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

G Gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

General overview of the engine compartment 295

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

GRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Head restraint

Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Head

F

R

R

head

In

Head

D

F

Head

A

A

A

C

D

F

H

H

L

Heat

S

Heat

Heat

High

Horn

I Iden

Index 309

d compartment in the boot

See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

king the doors manually if the central locking

fails to work

Locking the doors manually if the central lock-

ing fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

g periods of non-use

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 143

Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Luggage compartment liner . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Partition grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Retaining strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Side storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16

gage compartment cover

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

n beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

ntenance

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

ntenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 309 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Ignition key

Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Indicator lamps

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Trailer indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Indicator lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Instruments

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 120

Interior lights

Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 256

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Climate control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Settings for the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Light sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Lighting

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 120

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Dipped headlights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . 121

Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Rear lights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Liquid coolant

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Liquid coolant additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Loa

Loc

Loc

Lon

Lug

Lug

M Mai

Mai

Mai

Man

Index310

ator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

o display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ing lights

ront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

ear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

drinks holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

side window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

view mirror

ith manual anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . 131

view mirrors

nti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

terior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

window heating

eating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

window wash/wipe

utomatic rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . 130

window wiper

utomatic rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . 130

termittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 310 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Manual operation

Closing the sunroof manually . . . . . . . . . . 114

Fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Mirrors

Anti-dazzle interior rear-view mirror with auto-

matic adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Automatic exterior mirror adjustment . . . . 138

Enabling stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 221

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Driving with multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Oil level

Check level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Override function

Sunroof override function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Overview

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

P Paddle levers

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Parking aid

SEAT parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

SEAT parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Partition grille

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Power point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 211

Q Quartz clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

R Radi

Radi

Rain

Rain

Read

F

R

Rear

Rear

Rear

Rear

Rear

W

Rear

A

In

Rear

H

Rear

Rear

A

Rear

A

In

Refu

Regi

Index 311

ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Electric backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Manual adjustment of lumbar support . . . 135

Manual backrest angle adjustment . . . . . . 135

Moving the seat forwards and backwards . 134

Seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

ctor lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

-directing headlights

faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ice indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

otronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ing position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

ing position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

w chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 294

r-powered blower/solar roof . . . . . . . . . . . 169

re keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

re parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 311 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Remote control key

Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . 106

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Re-synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Repairs

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Reverse gear

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Roof rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Running in

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

S SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Aspects to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety instructions

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Safety notes

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 45

frontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Seat adjustment

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 68

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Sea

Sele

Self

Serv

Serv

Sho

Side

Side

Sitt

Sitt

Ski

Sno

Sola

Spa

Spa

Index312

er weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 90, 242

oss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

repair kit

yre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

and wheels

imensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 242

rbody maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

cle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

cle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

cle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

cle Maintenance

xterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

cle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 312 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Spare wheel

Steel rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82

Speed warning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Steering

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Manual steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . 170

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Sun roof

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Sun roof / deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Automatic close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Override function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Supplementary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Switches in the driver's door

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Symbols

Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 77

Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79

T Tailgate

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

TCS

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20

The environment

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Roof carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 294

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Tow starting

Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 288

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Notes on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 201

Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Traction control system

How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Trail

Trip

Type

Tyre

Tyre

Tyre

L

Tyre

Tyre

Tyre

Tyre

T

Tyres

D

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

U Unde

V Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

E

Vehi

Index 313

ExeoST_EN.book Seite 313 Donnerstag, 3. September 2009 12:24 12

Vehicle paintwork

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 211

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Warning lamps

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . 68

Engine management (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . 66

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Yellow symbols in central display . . . . . . . . 79

Warning lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 213

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 294

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 28

Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Windows

Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Winter conditions

Defrost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Winter operations

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

EX EO

S T

O W

N ER

S M

A

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Exeo Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Exeo as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Exeo. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Exeo Edition 07.09 2009 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.